Toshiba Life Jacket U200 User Manual
Satellite U200/PORTÉGÉ M500  
TOSHIBA  
Satellite U200/PORTÉGÉ M500  
Portable Personal Computer  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TruSurround XT, WOW HD, Circle Surround Xtract, TruBass, SRS 3D,  
Definition and FOCUS technologies are incorporated under license from  
SRS Labs, Inc.  
Other trademarks and registered trademarks not listed above may be used  
in this manual.  
FCC information  
Product Name : Satellite U200/PORTÉGÉ M500  
Model number : PLUA0/PPM51  
FCC notice "Declaration of Conformity Information"  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a  
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits  
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference  
in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate  
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the  
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.  
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a  
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to  
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the  
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the  
interference by one or more of the following measures:  
■ Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
■ Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
■ Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to  
which the receiver is connected.  
■ Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
Only peripherals complying with the FCC class B limits may be attached to  
this equipment. Operation with non-compliant peripherals or peripherals  
not recommended by TOSHIBA is likely to result in interference to radio  
and TV reception. Shielded cables must be used between the external  
devices and the computer’s external monitor port, USB port, IEEE1394  
port and microphone jack. Changes or modifications made to this  
equipment, not expressly approved by TOSHIBA or parties authorized by  
TOSHIBA could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
FCC conditions  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to  
the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired operation.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iii  
Contact  
Address:  
TOSHIBA America Information Systems, Inc.  
9740 Irvine Boulevard  
Irvine, California 92618-1697  
Telephone: (949) 583-3000  
EU Declaration of Conformity  
TOSHIBA declares, that the product: PLUA0*/PPM51* conforms to the  
following Standards:  
Supplementary  
Information:  
“The product complies with the requirements of  
the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, the EMC  
Directive 89/336/EEC and/or the R&TTE  
Directive 1999/05/EEC.”  
This product is carrying the CE-Mark in accordance with the related  
European Directives. Responsible for CE-Marking is TOSHIBA Europe  
Gmblt, Hammfelddamm 8, 41460 Neuss, Germany.  
VCCI Class B Information  
Modem warning notice  
Conformity Statement  
The equipment has been approved to [Commission Decision “CTR21”] for  
pan-European single terminal connection to the Public Switched Telephone  
Network (PSTN).  
However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in  
different countries/regions the approval does not, of itself, give an  
unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network  
termination point.  
iv  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the  
first instance.  
Network Compatibility Statement  
This product is designed to work with, and is compatible with the following  
networks. It has been tested to and found to conform with the additional  
requirements conditional in EG 201 121.  
Germany  
ATAAB AN005,AN006,AN007,AN009,AN010  
and DE03,04,05,08,09,12,14,17  
Greece  
ATAAB AN005,AN006 and GR01,02,03,04  
Portugal  
ATAAB AN001,005,006,007,011 and  
P03,04,08,10  
Spain  
ATAAB AN005,007,012, and ES01  
ATAAB AN002  
Switzerland  
All other countries/regions ATAAB AN003,004  
Specific switch settings or software setup are required for each network,  
please refer to the relevant sections of the user guide for more details.  
The hookflash (timed break register recall) function is subject to separate  
national type approvals. It has not been tested for conformity to national  
type regulations, and no guarantee of successful operation of that specific  
function on specific national networks can be given.  
Japan regulations  
Region selection  
If you are using the computer in Japan, technical regulations described in  
the Telecommunications Business Law require that you select the Japan  
region mode. It is illegal to use the modem in Japan with any other  
selection.  
Redial  
Up to two redial attempts can be made. If more than two redial attempts are  
made, the modem will return Black Listed. If you are experiencing  
problems with the Black Listed code, set the interval between redials at one  
minute or longer.  
Japan’s Telecommunications Business Law permits up to two redials on  
analogue telephones, but the redials must be made within a total of three  
minutes.  
The internal modem is approved by Japan Approvals Institute for  
Telecommunications Equipment.  
A04-0609001  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
One of the labels is located on the module.  
Pursuant to FCC CFR 47, Part 68:  
When you are ready to install or use the modem, call your local telephone  
company and give them the following information:  
■ The telephone number of the line to which you will connect the modem  
■ The registration number that is located on the device  
The FCC registration number of the modem will be found on either the  
device which is to be installed, or, if already installed, on the bottom of the  
computer outside of the main system label.  
■ The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) of the modem, which can vary.  
For the REN of your modem, refer to your modem’s label.  
The modem connects to the telephone line by means of a standard jack  
called the USOC RJ11C.  
vi  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Type of service  
Your modem is designed to be used on standard-device telephone lines.  
Connection to telephone company-provided coin service (central office  
implemented systems) is prohibited. Connection to party lines service is  
subject to state tariffs. If you have any questions about your telephone line,  
such as how many pieces of equipment you can connect to it, the  
telephone company will provide this information upon request.  
Telephone company procedures  
The goal of the telephone company is to provide you with the best service it  
can. In order to do this, it may occasionally be necessary for them to make  
changes in their equipment, operations, or procedures. If these changes  
might affect your service or the operation of your equipment, the telephone  
company will give you notice in writing to allow you to make any changes  
necessary to maintain uninterrupted service.  
If problems arise  
If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should  
immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may cause harm to  
the telephone network. If the telephone company notes a problem, they  
may temporarily discontinue service. When practical, they will notify you in  
advance of this disconnection. If advance notice is not feasible, you will be  
notified as soon as possible. When you are notified, you will be given the  
opportunity to correct the problem and informed of your right to file a  
complaint with the FCC. In the event repairs are ever needed on your  
modem, they should be performed by TOSHIBA Corporation or an  
authorized representative of TOSHIBA Corporation.  
Disconnection  
If you should ever decide to permanently disconnect your modem from its  
present line, please call the telephone company and let them know of this  
change.  
Fax branding  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any  
person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message  
via a telephone fax machine unless such message clearly contains in a  
margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of  
the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the  
business, other entity or individual sending the message and the telephone  
number of the sending machine or such business, other entity or individual.  
In order to program this information into your fax modem, you should  
complete the setup of your fax software before sending messages.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vii  
Instructions for IC CS-03 certified equipment  
1. The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This  
certification means that the equipment meets certain  
telecommunications network protective, operational and safety  
requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment  
Technical Requirements document(s). The Department does not  
guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.  
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is  
permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local  
telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed  
using an acceptable method of connection.  
The customer should be aware that compliance with the above  
conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.  
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a  
representative designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations  
made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may  
give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to  
disconnect the equipment.  
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground  
connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic  
water pipe systems, if present, are connected together. This precaution  
may be particularly important in rural areas.  
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but  
should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician,  
as appropriate.  
2. The user manual of analog equipment must contain the equipment’s  
Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) and an explanation notice similar to  
the following:  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) of the modem, which can vary.  
For the REN of your modem, refer to your modem’s label.  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device  
provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be  
connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may  
consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that  
the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not  
exceed 5.  
3. The standard connecting arrangement (telephone jack type) for this  
equipment is jack type(s): USOC RJ11C.  
The IC registration number of the modem is shown below.  
Canada: 4005B-ATHENS  
viii  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes for Users in Australia and New Zealand  
Modem warning notice for Australia  
Modems connected to the Australian telecoms network must have a valid  
Austel permit. This modem has been designed to specifically configure to  
ensure compliance with Austel standards when the country/region selection  
is set to Australia. The use of other country/region setting while the modem  
is attached to the Australian PSTN would result in you modem being  
operated in a non-compliant manner. To verify that the country/region is  
correctly set, enter the command ATI which displays the currently active  
setting.  
To set the country/region permanently to Australia, enter the following  
command sequence:  
AT%TE=1  
ATS133=1  
AT&F  
AT&W  
AT%TE=0  
ATZ  
Failure to set the modem to the Australia country/region setting as shown  
above will result in the modem being operated in a non-compliant manner.  
Consequently, there would be no permit in force for this equipment and the  
Telecoms Act 1991 prescribes a penalty of $12,000 for the connection of  
non-permitted equipment.  
Notes for use of this device in New Zealand  
■ The grant of a Telepermit for a device in no way indicates Telecom  
acceptance of responsibility for the correct operation of that device  
under all operating conditions. In particular the higher speeds at which  
this modem is capable of operating depend on a specific network  
implementation which is only one of many ways of delivering high  
quality voice telephony to customers. Failure to operate should not be  
reported as a fault to Telecom.  
■ In addition to satisfactory line conditions a modem can only work  
properly if:  
a/ it is compatible with the modem at the other end of the call and.  
b/ the application using the modem is compatible with the application  
at the other end of the call - e.g., accessing the Internet requires  
suitable software in addition to a modem.  
■ This equipment shall not be used in any manner which could constitute  
a nuisance to other Telecom customers.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ix  
■ Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom’s PTC  
Specifications are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with  
this modem. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within  
the following limits for compliance with Telecom Specifications:  
a/ There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number  
within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation, and  
b/ The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30  
seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the  
next.  
c/ Automatic calls to different numbers shall be not less than 5  
seconds apart.  
■ Immediately disconnect this equipment should it become physically  
damaged, and arrange for its disposal or repair.  
■ The correct settings for use with this modem in New Zealand are as  
follows:  
ATB0 (CCITT operation)  
AT&G2 (1800 Hz guard tone)  
AT&P1 (Decadic dialing make-break ratio =33%/67%)  
ATS0=0 (not auto answer)  
ATS6=4 (Blind dial delay)  
ATS7=less than 90 (Time to wait to carrier after dialing)  
ATS10=less than 150 (loss of carrier to hangup delay, factory  
default of 15 recommended)  
ATS11=90 (DTMF dialing on/off duration=90 ms)  
ATX2 (Dial tone detect, but not (U.S.A.) call progress detect)  
■ When used in the Auto Answer mode, the S0 register must be set with a  
value of 3 or 4. This ensures:  
■ a person calling your modem will hear a short burst of ringing before  
the modem answers. This confirms that the call has been  
successfully switched through the network.  
■ caller identification information (which occurs between the first and  
second ring cadences) is not destroyed.  
■ The preferred method of dialing is to use DTMF tones (ATDT...) as this  
is faster and more reliable than pulse (decadic) dialing. If for some  
reason you must use decadic dialing, your communications program  
must be set up to record numbers using the following translation table  
as this modem does not implement the New Zealand “Reverse Dialing”  
standard.  
Number to be dialed: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
Number to program into computer: 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1  
Note that where DTMF dialing is used, the numbers should be  
entered normally.  
x
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
■ The transmit level from this device is set at a fixed level and because of  
this there may be circumstances where the performance is less than  
optimal. Before reporting such occurrences as faults, please check the  
line with a standard Telepermitted telephone, and only report a fault if  
the phone performance is impaired.  
■ It is recommended that this equipment be disconnected from the  
Telecom line during electrical storms.  
■ When relocating the equipment, always disconnect the Telecom line  
connection before the power connection, and reconnect the power first.  
■ This equipment may not be compatible with Telecom Distinctive Alert  
cadences and services such as FaxAbility.  
NOTE THAT FAULT CALLOUTS CAUSED BY ANY OF THE ABOVE  
CAUSES MAY INCUR A CHARGE FROM TELECOM  
General conditions  
As required by PTC 100, please ensure that this office is advised of any  
changes to the specifications of these products which might affect  
compliance with the relevant PTC Specifications.  
The grant of this Telepermit is specific to the above products with the  
marketing description as stated on the Telepermit label artwork. The  
Telepermit may not be assigned to other parties or other products without  
Telecom approval.  
A Telepermit artwork for each device is included from which you may  
prepare any number of Telepermit labels subject to the general instructions  
on format, size and color on the attached sheet.  
The Telepermit label must be displayed on the product at all times as proof  
to purchasers and service personnel that the product is able to be  
legitimately connected to the Telecom network.  
The Telepermit label may also be shown on the packaging of the product  
and in the sales literature, as required in PTC 100.  
The charge for a Telepermit assessment is $337.50. An additional charge  
of $337.50 is payable where an assessment is based on reports against  
non-Telecom New Zealand Specifications. $112.50 is charged for each  
variation when submitted at the same time as the original.  
An invoice for $NZ1237.50 will be sent under separate cover.  
Following information is only for EU-member states:  
The use of the symbol indicates that this product may not be treated as  
household waste. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will  
help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and  
human health, which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste  
handling of this product. For more detailed information about recycling of  
this product, please contact your local city office, your household waste  
disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xi  
Optical disc drive safety instructions  
Be sure to check the international precautions at the end of this section.  
Panasonic Communications  
DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive UJDA765  
■ The DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive UJDA765 employs a laser system.  
To ensure proper use of this product, please read this instruction  
manual carefully and retain for future reference. Should the unit ever  
require maintenance, contact an authorized service location.  
■ Use of controls, adjustments or the performance of procedures other  
than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
■ To prevent direct exposure to the laser beam, do not try to open the  
enclosure.  
xii  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVD Super Multi with Double Layer Recording UJ-842  
■ The DVD Super Multi drive with Double Layer Recording model  
employs a laser system. To ensure proper use of this product, please  
read this instruction manual carefully and retain for future reference.  
Should the unit ever require maintenance, contact an authorized  
service location.  
■ Use of controls, adjustments or the performance of procedures other  
than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
■ To prevent direct exposure to the laser beam, do not try to open the  
enclosure.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xiii  
International precautions  
CAUTION: This appliance contains a  
laser system and is classified as a  
“CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT.” To use  
this model properly, read the instruction  
manual carefully and keep this manual  
for your future reference. In case of any  
trouble with this model, please contact  
your nearest “AUTHORIZED service  
station.” To prevent direct exposure to the  
laser beam, do not try to open the  
enclosure.  
VORSICHT: Dieses Gerät enthält ein  
Laser-System und ist als  
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
LASERSCHUTZKLASSE 1  
PRODUKT  
“LASERSCHUTZKLASSE 1 PRODUKT”  
klassifiziert. Für den richtigen Gebrauch  
dieses Modells lesen Sie bitte die  
Bedienungsanleitung sorgfältig durch  
und bewahren diese bitte als Referenz  
auf. Falls Probleme mit diesem Modell  
auftreten, benachrichtigen Sie bitte die  
nächste “autorisierte Service-Vertretung”.  
Um einen direkten Kontakt mit dem  
Laserstrahl zu vermeiden darf das Gerät  
nicht geöffnet werden.  
TOEN60825  
ADVARSEL: Denne mærking er anbragt  
udvendigt på apparatet og indikerer, at  
apparatet arbejder med laserstråler af  
klasse 1, hviket betyder, at der anvendes  
laserstrlier af svageste klasse, og at man  
ikke på apparatets yderside kan bilve  
udsat for utilladellg kraftig stråling.  
ADVERSEL:USYNLIG  
LASERSTRÅLING VED  
ÅBNING, NÅR  
SIKKERHEDSAF-BRYDER  
ER UDE AF FUNKTION.  
UNDGÅ UDSÆTTSLSE  
FOR STRÅLING  
APPARATET BOR KUN ÅBNES AF  
FAGFOLK MED SÆRLIGT KENDSKAB  
TIL APPARATER MED  
LASERSTRÅLER!  
Indvendigt i apparatet er anbragt den her  
gengivne advarselsmækning, som  
advarer imod at foretage sådanne  
indgreb i apparatet, at man kan komme til  
at udsatte sig for laserstråling.  
xiv  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OBS! Apparaten innehåller  
laserkomponent som avger laserstråining  
överstigande gränsen för laserklass 1.  
VAROITUS. Suojakoteloa si saa avata.  
Laite sisältää laserdiodin, joka lähetää  
näkymätöntä silmilie vaarallista  
lasersäteilyä.  
CAUTION: USE OF CONTROLS OR  
ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE  
OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN  
THOSE SPECIFIED IN THE OWNER’S  
MANUAL MAY RESULT IN  
HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.  
VORSICHT: DIE VERWENDUNG VON  
ANDEREN STEURUNGEN ODER  
EINSTELLUNGEN ODER DAS  
DURCHFÜHREN VON ANDEREN  
VORGÄNGEN ALS IN DER  
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG  
BESCHRIEBEN KÖNNEN  
GEFÄHRLICHE  
STRAHLENEXPOSITIONEN ZUR  
FOLGE HABEN.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xv  
xvi  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Satellite U200/PORTÉGÉ M500  
Table of Contents  
Preface  
Manual contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxv  
Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi  
Abbreviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxvi  
Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxvi  
Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxvi  
Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii  
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii  
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii  
General Precautions  
Stress injury. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxix  
Heat injury . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxix  
Pressure or impact damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxx  
PC card overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxx  
Mobile phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxx  
Introduction  
Equipment checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1  
Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1  
Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2  
Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3  
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
Special features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11  
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14  
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18  
The Grand Tour  
Front with the display closed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1  
Left side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Right side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4  
Back side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
Underside. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
Front with the display open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7  
System indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9  
Keyboard indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10  
User’s Manual  
xvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USB floppy disk drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11  
Optical disc drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12  
Region codes for DVD drives and media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12  
Writable discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12  
CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12  
DVDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13  
Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13  
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13  
DVD Super Multi drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14  
AC adaptor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14  
Getting Started  
Setting up your work space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1  
General conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
Placement of the computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
Seating and posture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4  
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
Work habits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
Strategic Rest Breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6  
Other Things to Note. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6  
Connecting the AC adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6  
Opening the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8  
Turning on the power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9  
Starting up for the first time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10  
Turning off the power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10  
Shut Down mode (Boot mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10  
Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10  
Hibernation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12  
Restarting the computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14  
Create Optical Recovery Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14  
Creating the Optical Recovery Disc of Express Media Player . . . . 3-15  
Restoring the preinstalled software from the Recovery HDD. . . . . 3-15  
Restoring the preinstalled software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16  
Operating Basics  
Using the Touch Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
Using the Fingerprint Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
Points to note about the Fingerprint Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
How to Delete the Fingerprint Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3  
Points to note about the Fingerprint Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
Set Up Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
Window Logon via Fingerprint Authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5  
Fingerprint Power-on Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
Fingerprint Single Sign-On Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7  
xviii  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Swipe the Finger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8  
Front operation buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8  
Using the USB floppy disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11  
Connecting the USB floppy disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11  
Disconnecting USB floppy disk drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11  
Using optical disc drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12  
Loading discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12  
Removing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14  
How to remove CD/DVD when the disc tray will not open. . . . . . . . 4-15  
Writing CDs on DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16  
Before writing or rewriting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16  
When writing or rewriting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17  
Writing CD/DVDs on DVD Super Multi drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18  
Important message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18  
Legal Footnotes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18  
Before writing or rewriting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
When writing or rewriting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21  
RecordNow! Basic for TOSHIBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22  
TOSHIBA Disc Creator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23  
Data Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24  
DLA for TOSHIBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24  
TOSHIBA Direct Disc Writer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25  
When using WinDVD Creator Platinum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25  
How to make a DVD-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26  
How to learn more about InterVideo WinDVD Creator . . . . . . . . . . 4-26  
Important information for use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26  
Media care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28  
CD/DVDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28  
Floppy disks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28  
Sound system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29  
Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29  
Microphone level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29  
SoundMAX control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29  
Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30  
Region selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30  
Properties menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31  
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31  
Modem Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32  
Dialing Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32  
Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32  
Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33  
User’s Manual  
xix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wireless communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33  
Wireless LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34  
Bluetooth wireless technology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34  
BluetoothTM Stack for Windows® by TOSHIBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35  
Wireless communication switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36  
Wireless communication Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36  
LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37  
LAN cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37  
Connecting LAN cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37  
Disconnecting LAN cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38  
Cleaning the computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38  
Moving the computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39  
Using the Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39  
TOSHIBA HDD Protection Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41  
Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42  
Heat dispersal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42  
The Keyboard  
Typewriter keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1  
Function keys: F1 … F12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Soft keys: Fn key combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Emulating keys on enhanced keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Hot keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
Fn Sticky key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6  
Windows special keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Keypad overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Turning on the overlays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Temporarily using normal keyboard (overlay on) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8  
Temporarily using overlay (overlay off) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8  
Temporarily changing modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9  
Generating ASCII characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
Power conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1  
Power indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Battery indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
DC IN indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3  
Power indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3  
Battery types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3  
Battery pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3  
Real Time Clock (RTC) battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5  
xx  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Care and use of the battery pack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5  
Safety precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5  
Charging the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8  
Monitoring battery capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10  
Maximizing battery operating time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10  
Retaining data with power off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11  
Extending battery life. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11  
Replacing the battery pack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12  
TOSHIBA Password Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14  
User Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14  
Supervisor Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16  
Starting the computer by password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16  
Power-up modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17  
Windows utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17  
Hot keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17  
Panel power on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17  
System Auto Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17  
HW Setup  
Accessing HW Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1  
HW Setup window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1  
Configuring the Execute-Disable Bit Capability and TPM. . . . . . . . . 7-8  
Starting and Ending the BIOS Setup Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8  
Execute-Disable Bit Capability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10  
LCD Display Stretch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10  
Security controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10  
Diagnostic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11  
Optional Devices  
PC card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2  
Inserting a PC card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2  
Removing a PC card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3  
Bridge media slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3  
Media care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4  
SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4  
Memory Stick/Memory Stick Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6  
xD picture card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8  
MultiMediaCard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9  
Memory expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10  
Installing memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11  
Removing memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14  
Battery Pack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15  
Universal AC Adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15  
Battery Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16  
User’s Manual  
xxi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USB floppy disk drive (USB FDD Kit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16  
External monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16  
i.LINK (IEEE1394) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17  
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17  
Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18  
Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18  
Bluetooth USB Adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18  
Wireless Optical Mouse with Bluetooth Technology. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19  
Wireless Stereo Headset with Bluetooth Technology . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19  
Security lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19  
Troubleshooting  
Problem solving process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Preliminary checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Analyzing the problem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Hardware and system checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
System start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
Self test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7  
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7  
Internal LCD display panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8  
Hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8  
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9  
DVD Super Multi drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10  
USB floppy disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11  
SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11  
PC card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12  
Memory Stick/Memory Stick Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12  
xD picture card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12  
MultiMediaCard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13  
Pointing Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13  
Fingerprint Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15  
USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15  
Bios Beep Sounds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16  
Memory expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16  
Sound system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16  
External monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17  
i.LINK (IEEE1394) device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17  
Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18  
LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19  
Wireless LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19  
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19  
xxii  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disposing of PC and PC batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20  
TOSHIBA support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21  
Before you call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21  
Where to write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21  
Legal Footnotes  
CPU*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1  
Memory (Main System)*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2  
Battery Life*3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2  
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity*4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2  
LCD*5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3  
Graphics Processor Unit ("GPU")*6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3  
Wireless LAN*7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3  
Non-applicable Icons*8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3  
Copy Protection*9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3  
Images*10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3  
Express Media Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4  
Appendix A Specifications  
Appendix B Display Controller and Modes  
Appendix C AT Commands  
Appendix D S-registers  
Appendix E V.90  
Appendix F Wireless LAN  
Appendix G AC Power Cord and Connectors  
Appendix H TOSHIBA Anti-theft Protection Timer  
Glossary  
Index  
User’s Manual  
xxiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xxiv  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Satellite U200/PORTÉGÉ M500  
Preface  
Congratulations on your purchase of the Satellite U200/PORTÉGÉ M500  
computer. This powerful notebook computer provides excellent expansion  
capability, including multimedia devices, and it is designed to provide years  
of reliable, high-performance computing.  
This manual tells how to set up and begin using your Satellite U200/  
PORTÉGÉ M500 computer. It also provides detailed information on  
configuring your computer, basic operations and care, using optional  
devices and troubleshooting.  
If you are a new user of computers or if you’re new to portable computing,  
first read over the Introduction and The Grand Tour chapters to familiarize  
yourself with the computer’s features, components and accessory devices.  
Then read Getting Started for step-by-step instructions on setting up your  
computer.  
If you are an experienced computer user, please continue reading the  
preface to learn how this manual is organized, then become acquainted  
with this manual by browsing through its pages. Be sure to look over the  
Special features section of the Introduction, to learn about features that are  
uncommon or unique to the computer and carefully read HW Setup.  
If you are going to install PC cards or connect external devices such as a  
monitor, be sure to read Chapter 8, Optional Devices.  
Manual contents  
This manual is made up of the following.  
Chapter 1, Introduction, is an overview of the computer’s features,  
capabilities, and options.  
Chapter 2, The Grand Tour, identifies the components of the computer and  
briefly explains how they function.  
Chapter 3, Getting Started, provides a quick overview of how to begin  
operating your computer and gives tips on safety and designing your work  
area.  
Chapter 4, Operating Basics, describes the basic operations of your  
computer and precautions when using it, as well as the handling of CDs/  
DVDs.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xxv  
Preface  
Chapter 5, The Keyboard, describes special keyboard functions including  
the keypad overlay and hot keys.  
Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes, gives details on the computer’s  
power resources and battery save modes and how to set a password.  
Chapter 7, HW Setup, explains how to configure the computer using the  
HW Setup program and TPM.  
Chapter 8, Optional Devices, describes the optional hardware available.  
Chapter 9, Troubleshooting, provides helpful information on how to perform  
some diagnostic tests, and suggests courses of action if the computer  
doesn’t seem to be working properly.  
Chapter 10, Legal Footnotes, provides Legal Footnote information related  
to your computer.  
The Appendixes provide technical information about your computer.  
The Glossary defines general computer terminology and includes a list of  
acronyms used in the text.  
The Index quickly directs you to the information contained in this manual.  
Conventions  
This manual uses the following formats to describe, identify, and highlight  
terms and operating procedures.  
Abbreviations  
On first appearance, and whenever necessary for clarity, abbreviations are  
enclosed in parentheses following their definition. For example: Read Only  
Memory (ROM). Acronyms are also defined in the Glossary.  
Icons  
Icons identify ports, dials, and other parts of your computer. The indicator  
panel also uses icons to identify the components it is providing information  
on.  
Keys  
The keyboard keys are used in the text to describe many computer  
operations. A distinctive typeface identifies the key top symbols as they  
appear on the keyboard. For example, Enter identifies the Enter key.  
xxvi  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface  
Key operation  
Some operations require you to simultaneously use two or more keys. We  
identify such operations by the key top symbols separated by a plus sign  
(+). For example, Ctrl + C means you must hold down Ctrl and at the same  
time press C. If three keys are used, hold down the first two and at the  
same time press the third.  
When procedures require an action such as  
clicking an icon or entering text, the icon’s name  
or the text you are to type in is represented in the  
type face you see to the left.  
ABC  
Display  
Names of windows or icons or text generated by  
the computer that appear on its display screen  
are presented in the type face you see to the left.  
S
ABC  
Messages  
Messages are used in this manual to bring important information to your  
attention. Each type of message is identified as shown below.  
Pay attention! A caution informs you that improper use of equipment or  
failure to follow instructions may cause data loss or damage your  
equipment.  
Please read. A note is a hint or advice that helps you make best use of  
your equipment.  
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which could result in death or  
serious injury, if you do not follow instructions.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xxvii  
Preface  
xxviii  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Satellite U200/PORTÉGÉ M500  
General Precautions  
TOSHIBA computers are designed to optimize safety, minimize strain and  
withstand the rigors of portability. However, certain precautions should be  
observed to further reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the  
computer.  
Be certain to read the general precautions below and to note the cautions  
included in the text of the manual.  
Stress injury  
Carefully read the Instruction Manual for Safety & Comfort. It contains  
information on prevention of stress injuries to your hands and wrists than  
can be caused by extensive keyboard use. Chapter 3, Getting Started, also  
includes information on work space design, posture and lighting that can  
help reduce physical stress.  
Heat injury  
■ Avoid prolonged physical contact with the computer. If the computer is  
used for long periods, its surface can become very warm. While the  
temperature will not feel hot to the touch, if you maintain physical  
contact with the computer for a long time (if you rest the computer on  
your lap, or if you keep your hands on the palm rest, for example) your  
skin might suffer low-heat injury.  
■ If the computer has been used for a long time, avoid direct contact with  
the metal plate supporting the I/O ports. It can become hot.  
■ The surface of the AC adaptor can become hot when in use. This  
condition does not indicate a malfunction. If you need to transport the  
AC adaptor, disconnect it and let it cool before moving it.  
■ Do not lay the AC adaptor on a material that is sensitive to heat. The  
material could be damaged.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xxix  
General Precautions  
Pressure or impact damage  
Do not apply heavy pressure to the computer or subject it to strong impact.  
Excessive pressure or impact can cause damage to computer components  
or otherwise cause malfunctions.  
PC card overheating  
Some PC cards can become hot with prolonged use. Overheating of a PC  
card can result in errors or instability in the PC card operation. Also be  
careful when you remove a PC card that has been used for a long time.  
Mobile phones  
Use of mobile phones can interfere with the audio system. Computer  
operation is not impaired but it is recommended that a distance of 30 cm be  
maintained between the computer and a mobile phone in use.  
xxx  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Satellite U200/PORTÉGÉ M500  
Chapter 1  
Introduction  
This chapter provides an equipment checklist, and it identifies the  
computer’s features, options and accessories.  
Some of the features described in this manual may not function properly if  
you use an operating system that was not preinstalled by TOSHIBA.  
Equipment checklist  
Carefully unpack your computer. Save the box and packing materials for  
future use.  
Hardware  
Check to make sure you have all the following items:  
■ Portable Personal Computer  
■ AC adaptor and power cord (2-pin plug or 3-pin plug)  
■ USB floppy disk drive (Option or provided with some models)  
■ Battery pack (Installed or separate from the computer)  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1  
Introduction  
Software  
®
Microsoft Windows XP Professional  
■ The following software is preinstalled:  
■ Microsoft® Windows XP Professional  
■ Microsoft® Internet Explorer  
■ TOSHIBA Utilities  
■ TOSHIBA SD Memory Boot Utility  
■ DVD Video Player  
■ InterVideo WinDVD Creator  
■ Fingerprint Utility (Is preinstalled with some models)  
■ RecordNow! Basic for TOSHIBA  
■ DLA for TOSHIBA  
■ TOSHIBA Power Saver  
■ TOSHIBA ConfigFree  
■ TOSHIBA Assist  
■ TOSHIBA Controls  
■ TOSHIBA PC Diagnostic Tool  
■ TOSHIBA Mic Effect  
■ TOSHIBA TouchPad On/Off Utility  
■ TOSHIBA Zooming Utility  
■ TOSHIBA SD Memory Card Format  
■ TOSHIBA Acoustic Silencer  
■ TOSHIBA Hotkey Utility for Display Devices  
■ TOSHIBA Password Utility  
■ Online manual  
1-2  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
®
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition  
■ The following software is preinstalled:  
■ Microsoft® Windows XP Home Edition  
■ Microsoft® Internet Explorer  
■ TOSHIBA Utilities  
■ TOSHIBA SD Memory Boot Utility  
■ DVD Video Player  
■ InterVideo WinDVD Creator  
■ Fingerprint Utility (Is preinstalled with some models)  
■ TOSHIBA Disc Creator  
■ TOSHIBA Direct Disc Writer  
■ TOSHIBA Power Saver  
■ TOSHIBA ConfigFree  
■ TOSHIBA Assist  
■ TOSHIBA Controls  
■ TOSHIBA PC Diagnostic Tool  
■ TOSHIBA Virtual Sound  
■ TOSHIBA TouchPad On/Off Utility  
■ TOSHIBA Zooming Utility  
■ TOSHIBA SD Memory Card Format  
■ TOSHIBA Acoustic Silencer  
■ TOSHIBA Hotkey Utility for Display Devices  
■ TOSHIBA Password Utility  
■ Online manual  
■ Product Recovery Media  
Documentation  
■ Portable Personal Computer User's Manual  
■ Microsoft Windows XP manual package (Is preinstalled in some  
regions)  
■ Instruction Manual for Safety & Comfort  
■ End User License Agreement  
If any of the items are missing or damaged, contact your dealer  
immediately.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-3  
Introduction  
Features  
The computer uses TOSHIBA’s advanced Large Scale Integration (LSI),  
Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS) technology  
extensively to provide compact size, minimum weight, low power usage,  
and high reliability. This computer incorporates the following features and  
benefits:  
Processor  
Built-in  
The computer is equipped with one of the  
following Intel® processors.  
■ Intel® Core™ Duo processor, which  
incorporates a 2MB level 2 cache memory. It  
also supports Enhanced Intel® SpeedStep®  
technology.  
■ Intel® Core™ Solo processor, which  
incorporates a 2MB level 2 cache memory. It  
also supports Enhanced Intel® SpeedStep®  
technology.  
■ Intel® Celeron® M Processor, which  
incorporates a 1MB level2 cache memory.  
®
®
Some models in this series carry Intel Centrino Duo Mobile Technology,  
®
which is based on three separate technologies of Intel Core™ Duo  
®
processor, Intel PRO/Wireless Network Connection, and Mobile Intel®  
945 Express Chipset Family.  
®
®
Some models in this series carry Intel Centrino Mobile Technology,  
®
which is based on three separate technologies of Intel Core™ Solo  
®
®
processor, Intel PRO/Wireless Network Connection, and Mobile Intel  
945 Express Chipset Family.  
Legal Footnote (CPU)*1  
For more information on the Legal Footnote regarding CPU, please refer to  
the Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 10. Click the *1.  
1-4  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Memory  
Slots  
256, 512, 1,024 or 2,048 MB memory modules  
can be installed in the two memory slots for a  
maximum of 4,096 MB (Intel® 945GM model) or a  
maximum of 2,048 MB (Intel® 940GML model)  
system memory.  
Legal Footnote (Memory (Main System))*2  
For more information on the Legal Footnote regarding Memory (Main  
System), please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 10. Click  
the *2.  
Video RAM  
Power  
128 MB of RAM is provided for video display.  
Battery pack  
The computer is powered by one rechargeable  
lithium-ion battery pack.  
Legal Footnote (Battery Life)*3  
For more information on the Legal Footnote regarding Battery Life, please  
refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 10. Click the *3.  
RTC battery  
AC adaptor  
The internal RTC battery backs up the Real Time  
Clock (RTC) and calendar.  
The AC adaptor provides power to the system  
and recharges the batteries when they are low. It  
comes with a detachable power cord which will  
either have a 2-pin or 3-pin plug enclosure.  
Because it is universal, it can receive a range of  
AC voltage from 100 to 240 volts; however, the  
output current varies among different models.  
Using the wrong model can damage your  
computer. Refer to the AC adaptor section in  
Chapter 2, The Grand Tour.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-5  
Introduction  
Disks  
Hard disk drive  
Available in five sizes.  
■ 40.0 billion bytes (37.26 GB)  
■ 60.0 billion bytes (55.89 GB)  
■ 80.0 billion bytes (74.53 GB)  
■ 100.0 billion bytes (93.16 GB)  
■ 120.0 billion bytes (111.79 GB)  
Part of the space on the hard disk drive is  
reserved as administration space.  
Legal Footnote (Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity)*4  
For more information on the Legal Footnote regarding Hard Disk Drive  
(HDD) Capacity, please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 10.  
Click the *4.  
USB floppy disk  
drive  
Accommodates either 3 1/2" 1.44-megabyte or  
720-kilobyte floppy disks. It connects to a USB  
port. Option or provided with some models.  
Optical disc drive  
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW Some models are equipped with a full-size, DVD-  
drive  
ROM&CD-R/RW drive module that lets you run  
CD/DVDs without using an adaptor. It reads  
DVD-ROMs at maximum 8 speed and CD-ROMs  
at maximum 24 speed. It writes CD-R at up to 24  
speed and CD-RW at 24 speed. The drive  
supports the following formats.  
■ CD-R  
■ CD-RW  
■ DVD-ROM  
■ DVD-Video  
■ CD-DA  
■ CD-Text  
■ Photo CD™ (single/multi-session)  
■ CD-ROM Mode 1, Mode 2  
■ CD-ROM XA Mode 2 (Form1, Form2)  
■ Enhanced CD (CD-EXTRA)  
■ Addressing Method 2  
1-6  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
DVD Super Multi  
drive Double  
Layer  
Some models are equipped with a full-size DVD  
Super Multi drive module that lets you record  
data to rewritable CD/DVDs as well as run either  
12cm (4.72") or 8cm (3.15") CD/DVDs without  
using an adaptor. It reads DVD-ROMs at  
maximum 8 speed and CD-ROMs at maximum  
24 speed. It writes CD-R at up to 24 speed, CD-  
RW at up to 16 speed, DVD-R and DVD+R at up  
to 8 speed, DVD-RW and DVD+RW at up to 4  
speed, DVD-R DL at up to 2 speed, DVD+R DL  
at up to 2.4 speed, DVD-RAM at maximum 3  
speed. This drive supports the following formats  
in addition to DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive.  
■ DVD-R  
■ DVD-R DL  
■ DVD-RW  
■ DVD+R  
■ DVD+R DL  
■ DVD+RW  
■ DVD-RAM  
2.6GB and 5.2GB DVD-RAM discs cannot be read from or written to.  
Display  
The computer’s LCD display panel supports high-resolution video graphics.  
The LCD screen can be set at a wide range of viewing angles for maximum  
comfort and readability.  
Built-in  
12.1" TFT LCD screen, 16 million colors, with a  
resolution of 1280 horizontal × 800 vertical pixels  
WXGA.  
Legal Footnote (LCD)*5  
For more information on the Legal Footnote regarding LCD, please refer to  
the Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 10. Click the *5.  
Graphics controller  
The graphics controller maximizes display  
performance. Refer to Appendix B, Display  
Controller and Modes section, for more  
information.  
Legal Footnote (Graphics Processor Unit ("GPU"))*6  
For more information on the Legal Footnote regarding Graphics Processor  
Unit (“GPU”), please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 10.  
Click the *6.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-7  
Introduction  
Keyboard  
®
Built-in  
84 keys or 85 keys, compatible with IBM  
enhanced keyboard, embedded numeric overlay,  
dedicated cursor control, and keys.  
Refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for details.  
Pointing Device  
Built-in Touch Pad  
A Touch Pad and control buttons in the palm rest  
enable control of the on-screen pointer and  
scrolling of windows.  
Ports  
External monitor  
Analog VGA port supports VESA DDC2B  
compatible functions.  
Universal Serial Bus The computer has Universal Serial Bus ports that  
(USB 2.0)  
comply with the USB 2.0 standard.  
i.LINK™ (IEEE1394)  
This port enables high-speed data transfer  
directly from external devices such as digital  
video cameras.  
Slots  
PC card  
The PC card slot accommodates a Type II card.  
Bridge media  
This slot lets you insert SD (SDIO) card, Memory  
Stick (Pro), xD picture card and MultiMediaCard.  
Refer to Chapter 8, Optional Devices.  
Multimedia  
Sound system  
A Windows sound system compatible sound  
system provides internal speakers and a  
microphone as well as supports jacks for an  
external microphone and headphones.  
Headphone jack  
Microphone jack  
A 3.5 mm mini headphone jack enables  
connection of stereo headphones.  
A 3.5 mm mini microphone jack enables  
connection of a three-conductor mini jack for  
monaural microphone input.  
1-8  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Communications  
Modem  
An internal modem provides capability for data  
and fax communication supporting the V.90  
(V.92) standards. Refer to V.90 section in  
Appendix E. The speed of data transfer and fax  
depends on analog telephone line conditions. It  
has a modem jack for connecting to a telephone  
line. It is preinstalled as a standard device in  
some markets. Both the V.90 and V.92 standards  
are supported only in the USA, Canada and  
Australia. Only V.90 is available in other regions.  
LAN  
The computer has built-in support for Ethernet  
LAN (10 megabits per second, 10BASE-T), Fast  
Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second,  
100BASE-TX) and Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000  
megabits per second, 1000BASE-T).  
Some models are equipped with a Gigabit  
Ethernet LAN.  
It is preinstalled as a standard device in some  
markets.  
Bluetooth  
Some computers in this series are equipped with  
Bluetooth functions. Bluetooth wireless  
technology eliminates the need for cables  
between electronic devices such as computers  
and printers. Bluetooth provides fast, reliable,  
and secure wireless communication in a small  
space.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-9  
Introduction  
Wireless LAN  
Some computers in this series are equipped with  
a Wireless LAN card that is compatible with other  
LAN systems based on Direct Sequence Spread  
Spectrum/Orthogonal Frequency Division  
Multiplexing radio technology that complies with  
the IEEE 802.11 Standard (Revision A, B or G).  
■ Theoretical maximum speed: 54Mbps  
(IEEE802.11a, 802.11g)  
■ Theoretical maximum speed: 11Mbps  
(IEEE802.11b)  
■ Frequency Channel Selection (5 GHz:  
Revision A / 2.4 GHz: Revision B/G)  
■ Roaming over multiple channels  
■ Card Power Management  
■ Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) data  
encryption, based on 152 bit encryption  
algorithm (Atheros module type).  
■ Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) data  
encryption, based on 128 bit encryption  
algorithm (Intel module type).  
■ Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA).  
■ Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) data  
encryption.  
■ The values shown above are the theoretical maximums for Wireless  
LAN standards. The actual values may differ.  
■ The transmission speed over the Wireless LAN and the distance over  
which Wireless LAN can reach may vary depending on surrounding  
electromagnetic environment, obstacles, access point design and  
configuration, and client design and software/hardware configurations.  
The transmission rate described is the theoretical maximum speed as  
specified under the appropriate standard - the actual transmission  
speed will be lower than the theoretical maximum speed.  
Legal Footnote (Wireless LAN)*7  
For more information on the Legal Footnote regarding Wireless LAN,  
please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 10. Click the *7.  
Wireless  
communication  
switch  
This switch turns the Wireless LAN and  
Bluetooth functions on and off.  
All models are provided with Wireless  
Communication switch. Some models are equipped  
with both Wireless LAN and Bluetooth functions.  
1-10  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Security  
Security lock slot  
Allows the connection of a security lock to anchor  
the computer to a desk or other large object.  
Special features  
The following features are either unique to TOSHIBA computers or are  
advanced features, which make the computer more convenient to use.  
Front operation  
buttons  
These buttons (TOSHIBA Assist, TOSHIBA  
Presentation, Internet, CD/DVD, Play/Pause,  
Stop, Previous, Next.) allow you to manage  
Audio/Video, run applications and access utilities.  
These buttons are provided with some models.  
Refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics, Front  
operation buttons.  
Different computer models have different  
combinations of buttons.  
Hot keys  
Hot keys are specific key combinations that let  
you quickly change the system configuration  
directly from the keyboard without running a  
system program.  
Display automatic  
power off  
This feature automatically cuts off power to the  
computer's LCD display panel when there is no  
keyboard input for a specified time.  
Power is restored when any key is pressed.  
You can specify the time in the Monitor power off  
item of the Basic Setup tab in TOSHIBA Power  
Saver.  
HDD automatic  
power off  
This feature automatically cuts off power to the  
hard disk drive when it is not accessed for a  
specified time. Power is restored when the hard  
disk is accessed. You can specify the time in the  
HDD power off item of the Basic Setup tab in  
TOSHIBA Power Saver.  
System automatic  
This feature automatically shuts down the system  
Standby/Hibernation into Standby Mode or Hibernation Mode when  
there is no input or hardware access for a  
specified time. You can specify the time and  
select either the System Standby or System  
Hibernation item of the Basic Setup tab in  
TOSHIBA Power Saver.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-11  
Introduction  
Keypad overlay  
A ten-key pad is integrated into the keyboard.  
Refer to the Keypad overlay section in Chapter 5,  
The Keyboard, for instructions on using the  
keypad overlay.  
Power on password Two levels of password security, supervisor and  
user, are available to prevent unauthorized  
access to your computer.  
Instant security  
A hot key function blanks the LCD screen and  
disables the computer providing data security.  
Intelligent power  
supply  
A microprocessor in the computer’s intelligent  
power supply detects the battery’s charge and  
calculates the remaining battery capacity. It also  
protects electronic components from abnormal  
conditions, such as voltage overload from an AC  
adaptor. You can monitor remaining battery  
capacity by using the Battery remaining item in  
TOSHIBA Power Saver.  
Battery save mode  
Panel power on/off  
This feature lets you save battery power. You can  
specify the Power Save Mode in the Profile item  
in TOSHIBA Power Saver.  
This feature turns power to the computer off  
when the computer’s LCD display panel is closed  
and turns it back on when the computer’s LCD  
display panel is opened. You can specify the  
setting in the When I close the lid item of the  
Setup Actions tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver.  
Low battery  
automatic  
hibernation  
When battery power is exhausted to the point that  
computer operation cannot be continued, the  
system automatically enters Hibernation and  
shuts down. You can specify the setting in the  
Setup Actions tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver.  
Heat dispersal  
To protect from overheating, the CPU has an  
internal temperature sensor. If the computer’s  
internal temperature rises to a certain level, the  
cooling fan is turned on or the processing speed  
is lowered. Use the Cooling Method item of the  
Basic Setup tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver.  
1-12  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Optical Disc Drive  
power icon  
Use this to turn the power of the Optical Disc  
Drive on or off. Clicking on the Optical Disc Drive  
icon on the taskbar will turn the power of the  
Optical Disc Drive on or off. If the Optical Disc  
Drive power is off, the disc tray will not open even  
if the eject button is pushed. The power of the  
Optical Disc Drive can be turned on using the  
Optical Disc Drive icon.  
HDD Protection  
Using the acceleration sensor built in the  
computer, the HDD Protection function detects  
vibration, shocks, and other such occurrences in  
the computer, and automatically moves the HDD  
(Hard Disk Drive) head to the safe position to  
reduce the risk of damage that could be caused  
to the disk by head-to-disk contact. Refer to the  
Using the Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Protection  
section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics, for  
details.  
The HDD Protection function does not guarantee that the hard disk drive  
will not be damaged.  
Hibernation  
This feature lets you turn off the power without  
exiting from your software. The contents of main  
memory are saved to the hard disk so that when  
you next turn the power on again, you can  
continue working right where you left off. Refer to  
the Turning off the power section in Chapter 3,  
Getting Started, for details.  
Standby  
If you have to interrupt your work, you can turn off  
the power without exiting from your software.  
Data is maintained in the computer’s main  
memory. When you turn on the power again, you  
can continue working right where you left off.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-13  
Introduction  
Utilities  
This section describes preinstalled utilities and tells how to start them. For  
details on usage and operation, refer to each utility’s online manual, help  
files or readme.txt files.  
TOSHIBA Power  
Saver  
To access the power management program, click  
start, click Control Panel, click Performance  
and Maintenance and click the TOSHIBA  
Power Saver icon.  
HW Setup  
This program lets you customize your hardware  
settings according to the way you work with your  
computer and the peripherals you use. To start  
the utility, To access this utility, click start, click  
Control Panel, click Printers and Other  
Hardware and click the TOSHIBA HWSetup  
icon.  
TOSHIBA Controls  
Fingerprint Utility  
This utility lets you assign applications or  
functions to the built-in buttons.  
To access this utility, click start, point to Control  
Panel, choose Printers and Other Hardware  
and click the Toshiba Controls icon.  
This product has a Fingerprint Utility installed for  
the purpose of enrolling and recognizing  
fingerprints. By enrolling the ID and password to  
the fingerprint authentication device, it is no  
longer necessary to input the password from the  
keyboard. Just by swiping the finger against the  
fingerprint sensor, the following functions will be  
enabled:  
■ Logon to Windows and access a security-  
enabled homepage through IE (Internet  
Explorer).  
■ Files and folders can be encrypted/decrypted  
and third party access to them prevented.  
■ Disable the password-protected screen-saver  
when returning from power-saving (standby)  
mode.  
■ Power-on Security and Single Sign-on  
feature.  
■ Authentication of the User Password and  
Hard Disk Drive Password when booting up  
the computer.  
It is provide with some models.  
1-14  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Fingerprint cannot be used in models that do not have a fingerprint module  
installed.  
Fn-esse  
This Windows program lets you define your own  
“shortcut” keys to quickly launch applications and  
speed your work in Windows. To start the utility,  
click start, point to All Programs, point to  
TOSHIBA, point to Utilities and click Fn-esse.  
DVD Video Player  
Bluetooth Stack for  
The DVD Video Player is used to play DVD-  
Videos. It has an on-screen interface and  
functions. Click start, point to All Programs,  
point to InterVideo WinDVD, then click  
InterVideo WinDVD.  
This software enables communication between  
Windows by Toshiba remote Bluetooth devices.  
Bluetooth cannot be used in models that do not have a Bluetooth module  
installed.  
TOSHIBA SD  
The TOSHIBA SD memory boot utility allows you  
Memory Boot Utility to create a bootable SD memory card to start the  
system. You can access TOSHIBA SD Memory  
Boot Utility from the menu bar as follows. Click  
start, point to All Programs, point to TOSHIBA,  
point to Utilities and click SD Memory Boot  
Utility.  
TOSHIBA Zooming  
Utility  
This utility allows you to enlarge or reduce the  
icon size on the desktop or the application  
window.  
RecordNow! Basic  
for TOSHIBA  
You can create CD/DVDs in several formats  
including audio CDs that can be played on a  
standard stereo CD player and data CD/DVDs to  
store the files and folders on your hard disk drive.  
This software can be used on a model with DVD-  
ROM&CD-R/RW drive and DVD Super Multi  
drive.  
This function is only in Windows XP Professional  
model.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-15  
Introduction  
TOSHIBA Disc  
Creator  
You can create CD/DVDs in several formats  
including audio CDs that can be played on a  
standard stereo CD player and data CD/DVDs to  
store the files and folders on your hard disk drive.  
This software can be used on a model with DVD-  
ROM&CD-R/RW drive and DVD Super Multi  
drive.  
This function is only in Windows XP Home  
Edition model.  
TOSHIBA Assist  
TOSHIBA Assist is a graphical user interface that  
provides easy access to help and services.  
TOSHIBA PC  
Diagnostic Tool  
TOSHIBA PC Diagnostic Tool displays the basic  
information on the computer's configuration and  
allows some of the built-in devices functionality to  
be tested. To start TOSHIBA PC Diagnostic Tool,  
click start, point to All Programs, point to  
TOSHIBA, point to Utilities and click PC  
Diagnostic Tool.  
TOSHIBA ConfigFree TOSHIBA ConfigFree is a suite of utilities to  
allow easy control of communication devices and  
network connections. TOSHIBA ConfigFree also  
allows you to find communication problems and  
create profiles for easy switching between  
locations and communication networks. To start  
ConfigFree, click start, point to All Programs,  
point to TOSHIBA, point to Networking and click  
ConfigFree.  
TOSHIBA TouchPad This utility allows you to disable/enable the  
On/Off Utility  
Touch Pad using the Fn + F9 Hot key.  
TOSHIBA Mic Effect The TOSHIBA Mic Effect utility provides you with  
Echo Canceller and Microphone Array functions.  
The echo cancellation function removes or  
reduces any harsh echoes or howling sounds  
that occur when playing audio sounds recorded  
with a microphone through the speakers. The  
echo cancellation function is available only when  
you use telephony software such as Windows  
Messenger with a voice conversation function.  
This function is only in Windows XP Professional  
model.  
For more instructions for this software, click  
start, point to All Programs, point to TOSHIBA,  
point to Utilities and click Mic Effect Help.  
1-16  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
TOSHIBA Virtual  
Sound  
TOSHIBA Virtual Sound works as an audio filter  
using SRS TruSurround XT, SRS WOW HD, and  
SRS Circle Surround Xtract functions provided  
by SRS Labs, Inc. in the United States.  
The audio filter enables you to enjoy improved  
quality sound and music on your computer.  
This function is only in Windows XP Home  
Edition model.  
For more instructions for this software, click  
start, point to All Programs, point to TOSHIBA,  
point to Utilities and click Virtual Sound Help.  
Sound drivers  
A broad range of audio controls are available  
through the ADI sound driver, including Software  
Synthesize, Mic Volume, Noise Reduction and  
Audio Power Management.  
Click start, click Control Panel and click  
SoundMAX icon to change the Mic Noise  
Reduction settings and the Power Management  
settings. If you are viewing the Control Panel in  
Category View, click on Switch to Classic View.  
For other sound settings, use the Windows  
Device Manager, Multimedia Panel or Volume  
Dial.  
TOSHIBA Password This utility lets you set a password that restricts  
Utility  
access to the computer.  
DLA for TOSHIBA  
DLA (Drive Letter Access) is a packet writing  
software which allows you to write files  
and/or folders to DVD-RW, CD-RW and  
DVD+RW discs via a drive letter like a floppy disk  
or other removable disks.  
This function is only in Windows XP Professional  
model.  
TOSHIBA Direct Disc TOSHIBA Direct Disc Writer is a packet writing  
Writer  
software which allows you to write files  
and/or folders to DVD-RW, CD-RW and  
DVD+RW discs via a drive letter like a floppy disk  
or other removable disks.  
This function is only in Windows XP Home  
Edition model.  
TOSHIBA Hotkey  
Utility for Display  
Devices  
This utility allows you to select the display device  
as well as change the display resolution on that  
device. Press the Fn + F5 Hot key to change the  
active display device and press the Fn + Space  
Hot key to change the display resolution.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-17  
Introduction  
TOSHIBA SD  
This utility allows you to format an SD memory  
Memory Card Format card by the SD standard format.  
CD/DVD Drive  
Acoustic Silencer  
This utility allows you to configure the read speed  
of the optical disc drive. You can either configure  
Normal Mode, which operates the drive at its  
maximum speed for quick data access, or Quiet  
Mode which runs audio CDs at single speed and  
which can lessen operational noise.  
It is ineffective with DVDs.  
Options  
You can add a number of options to make your computer even more  
powerful and convenient to use. You can buy the following options from  
TOSHIBA dealer.  
Memory expansion  
A 256, 512, 1,024 or 2,048 MB memory module  
(DDR2-533/667) can easily be installed in the  
computer.  
Battery Pack  
An additional battery pack can be purchased  
from your TOSHIBA dealer. Use it as a spare or  
replacement.  
Universal AC  
Adaptor  
If you use your computer at more than one site  
frequently, it may be convenient to purchase an  
additional AC adaptor for each site so you will not  
have to carry the adaptor with you.  
Battery Charger  
USB FDD Kit  
The battery charger lets you charge extra  
batteries outside the computer.  
The USB floppy disk drive accommodates either  
3 1/2" 1.44-megabyte or 720-kilobyte floppy  
disks through connection to a USB port. Please  
note that you cannot format 720-kilobyte floppy  
disks under Windows XP, but you are able to use  
disks that have been previously formatted.  
Bluetooth USB  
Adaptor  
When connected to one of the computer's USB  
ports, the Bluetooth USB Adaptor allows wireless  
communications to be carried out with Bluetooth-  
compatible equipment.  
You can buy this adaptor from your TOSHIBA  
dealer.  
1-18  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Wireless Optical  
Mouse with  
Bluetooth  
The Bluetooth Wireless Mouse is an optical  
mouse that is compatible with the Bluetooth  
wireless standard.  
Technology  
Wireless Stereo  
Headset with  
Bluetooth  
The Bluetooth Wireless Stereo Headset provides  
stereo headphones that are compatible with the  
Bluetooth wireless standard.  
Technology  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-19  
Introduction  
1-20  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Satellite U200/PORTÉGÉ M500  
Chapter 2  
The Grand Tour  
This chapter identifies the various components of your computer. Become  
familiar with each component before you operate the computer.  
Legal Footnote (Non-applicable Icons)*8  
For more information on the Legal Footnote regarding Non-applicable  
Icons, please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 10. Click the  
*8.  
Front with the display closed  
The following figure shows the computer’s front with its LCD display panel  
in the closed position.  
Microphone jack  
Headphone jack  
Display latch  
System  
indicators  
i.LINK (IEEE1394) port  
Microphone  
Figure 2-1 Front of the computer with LCD display panel closed  
System indicators  
Display latch  
These LEDs let you monitor the status of various  
computer functions. Details are given in the  
System indicators section.  
This latch secures the LCD panel in its closed  
position. Slide the latch to open the display.  
i.LINK (IEEE1394)  
port  
This port allows you to connect an external  
device, such as a digital video camera for  
high-speed data transfer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-1  
The Grand Tour  
Microphone  
A built-in microphone lets you record sound into  
your applications. Refer to the Sound system  
section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Microphone jack  
A 3.5 mm mini microphone jack enables  
connection of a three-conductor mini jack for  
monaural microphone input.  
Headphone jack  
A 3.5 mm mini headphone jack enables  
connection of stereo headphones.  
Left side  
The following figure shows the computer’s left side.  
PC card slot  
Security lock slot  
LAN active  
indicator (orange)  
Link indicator  
(green)  
PC card  
eject button  
DC IN 15V jack  
Cooling vents  
USB port  
Modem jack  
LAN jack  
Figure 2-2 The left side of the computer  
DC IN 15V jack  
The AC adaptor connects to this jack. Use only  
the model of AC adaptor that comes with the  
computer. Using the wrong adaptor can damage  
your computer.  
LAN jack  
This jack lets you connect to a LAN. The adaptor  
has built-in support for Ethernet LAN (10  
megabits per second, 10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet  
LAN (100 megabits per second, 100BASE-TX)  
and Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per  
second, 1000BASE-T). The LAN has two  
indicators. Refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics,  
for details.  
■ Do not connect any cable other than a LAN cable to the LAN jack. It  
could cause damage or malfunction.  
■ Do not connect the LAN cable to a power supply. It could cause  
damage or malfunction.  
2-2  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Grand Tour  
Link indicator  
(green)  
This indicator glows green when the computer is  
connected to a LAN and the LAN is functioning  
properly.  
LAN active indicator This indicator glows orange when data is being  
(orange)  
exchanged between the computer and the LAN.  
Cooling vents  
Cooling vents help CPU keep from overheating.  
Do not block the cooling vents. Never allow metal objects, such as screws,  
staples and paper clips, to enter the PC or keyboard. Foreign metal objects  
can create a short circuit, which can cause PC damage and fire, possibly  
resulting in serious injury.  
Security lock slot  
A security cable attaches to this slot. The  
optional security cable anchors your computer to  
a desk or other large object to deter theft.  
Universal Serial Bus One Universal Serial Bus port is on the left side.  
(USB 2.0) port The port complies with the USB 2.0 standard.  
Keep foreign objects out of the USB connectors. Never allow metal  
objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to enter the PC or  
keyboard. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can  
cause PC damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.  
Operation of all functions of all USB devices has not been confirmed.  
Some functions might not execute properly.  
Modem jack  
In areas where an internal modem is installed as  
standard equipment, the modem jack lets you  
use a modular cable to connect the modem  
directly to a telephone line.  
■ Connection to any communication line other than an analog phone line  
could cause a PC system failure.  
■ Connect the built-in modem only to ordinary analog phone lines.  
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a digital line (ISDN).  
■ Never connect the built-in modem to the digital connector on a  
public telephone or to a digital private branch exchange (PBX).  
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a key telephone system for  
residences or offices.  
■ Never operate your PC on AC power during a thunderstorm. If you see  
lightning or hear thunder, immediately turn off the PC. An electric surge  
caused by the storm, may result in a system failure, loss of data or  
hardware damage.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-3  
The Grand Tour  
PC card slot  
The PC card slot can accommodate a Type II  
card. The slot supports 16-bit PC cards and  
CardBus PC cards.  
PC card eject button This button is used to remove a PC card from the  
PC card slot.  
Keep foreign objects out of the PC card slot. Never allow metal objects,  
such as screws, staples and paper clips, to enter the PC or keyboard.  
Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can cause PC  
damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.  
Right side  
The following figure shows the computer’s right side.  
Volume control  
Bridge media slot  
External monitor port  
USB ports  
Optical disc drive  
Wireless communication  
switch  
Figure 2-3 The right side of the computer  
Volume control  
Use this dial to adjust the volume of the stereo  
speakers and the stereo headphones.  
Move the Volume control to the right to increase  
the volume and to the left to decrease the  
volume.  
Press the Volume control to Mute the sound.  
Press the Volume control again to turn Mute off.  
The mute icon will be displayed when the Volume  
control is pressed. The same function can be  
performed by pressing the Fn + Esc keys. Refer  
to the Hot keys section in Chapter 5 for details on  
the Fn + Esc keys.  
Bridge media slot  
This slot lets you insert an SD card (SDIO),  
Memory Stick (Pro), xD picture card and  
MultiMediaCard. Refer to Chapter 8, Optional  
Devices.  
2-4  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Grand Tour  
Keep foreign objects out of the Bridge media slot. Never allow metal  
objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to enter the PC or  
keyboard. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can  
cause PC damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.  
Wireless  
communication  
switch  
Slide this switch to the left to turn off Wireless  
LAN and Bluetooth functions. Slide it to the right  
to turn on the functions.  
All models are provided with a Wireless  
Communication switch although only some  
models are equipped with both Wireless LAN  
and Bluetooth functions.  
■ Turn WiFi and Bluetooth functionalities off when near a person who  
may have a cardiac pacemaker implant or other medical electric  
device. Radio waves may affect pacemaker or medical device  
operation, possibly resulting in serious injury. Follow the instruction of  
your medical device when using any WiFi or Bluetooth functionality.  
■ Always turn off WiFi or Bluetooth functionality if the PC is near  
automatic control equipment or appliances such as automatic doors or  
fire detectors. Radio waves can cause malfunction of such equipment,  
possibly resulting in serious injury.  
■ Do not use the WiFi or Bluetooth functionalities near a microwave oven  
or in areas subject to radio interference or magnetic fields. Interference  
from a microwave oven or other source can disrupt WiFi or Bluetooth  
operation.  
Optical disc drive  
The computer is configured with a DVD-  
ROM&CD-R/RW drive or a DVD Super Multi  
drive.  
External monitor  
port  
This external monitor port lets you connect an  
external video display.  
Universal Serial Bus Two Universal Serial Bus ports are on the right  
side. The ports comply with the USB 2.0  
standard.  
(USB 2.0) ports  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-5  
The Grand Tour  
Back side  
The following figure shows the computer’s back side.  
Battery pack  
Figure 2-4 The back side of the computer  
Battery pack  
The battery pack powers the computer when the  
AC adaptor is not connected. For detailed  
information on the battery pack, refer to Chapter  
6, Power and Power-Up Modes.  
Underside  
The following figure shows the underside of the computer. Make sure the  
display is closed before turning over your computer.  
Battery  
release latch  
Battery lock  
Figure 2-5 The underside of the computer  
2-6  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Grand Tour  
Battery lock  
Slide the battery lock to release the battery pack  
for removal.  
Battery release  
latch  
Slide and hold this latch to release the battery  
pack for removal.  
For detailed information on removing the battery  
pack, refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up  
Modes.  
Front with the display open  
This section shows the computer with the LCD display panel open. Refer to  
the appropriate illustration for details. To open the display, slide the display  
latch on the front of the LCD display panel and lift up. Position the LCD  
display panel at a comfortable viewing angle.  
Stereo speaker (Right)  
Display screen  
LCD Sensor switch (Not shown)  
Display hinge  
Touch Pad  
Fingerprint Sensor  
Stereo speaker  
(Left)  
Display hinge  
Power button  
Touch Pad  
control buttons  
Front operation  
buttons  
Figure 2-6 The front of the computer with the LCD display panel open  
Display hinge  
The display hinge holds the LCD display panel at  
easy-to-view angles.  
Stereo speakers  
The speakers emit sound generated by your  
software as well as audio alarms, such as low  
battery condition, generated by the system.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-7  
The Grand Tour  
Power button  
Press the power button to turn the computer’s  
power on and off.  
Front operation  
buttons  
Two buttons or six buttons are available for use:  
TOSHIBA Assist, TOSHIBA Presentation,  
Internet, CD/DVD, Play/Pause, Stop, Previous,  
Next.  
These buttons allow you to manage Audio/Video,  
run applications and access utilities. Refer to  
Chapter 4, Operating Basics, Front operation  
buttons.  
Touch Pad control  
buttons  
Control buttons below the Touch Pad let you  
select menu items or manipulate text and  
graphics designated by the on-screen pointer.  
Touch Pad  
A Touch Pad located in the center of the palm  
rest is used to control the on-screen pointer.  
Refer to the Using the Touch Pad section in  
Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Fingerprint Sensor  
Just by swiping the finger against the fingerprint  
sensor, the following functions will be enabled:  
■
Logon to Windows and access a security-  
enabled homepage through IE (Internet  
Explorer).  
■
■
Files and folders can be encrypted/decrypted  
and third party access to them prevented.  
Disable the password-protected screen-saver  
when returning from power-saving (standby)  
mode.  
■
■
Power-on Security and Single Sign-on feature.  
Authentication of the User Password and Hard  
Disk Drive Password when booting up the  
computer.  
It is provided with some models.  
LCD Sensor switch  
This switch senses when the computer’s LCD  
display panel is closed or opened and activates  
the Panel Power Off/On feature. When you close  
the LCD display panel the computer enters  
Hibernation Mode and shuts down. When you  
open the computer's LCD display panel the  
computer starts in Hibernation Mode. Use the  
TOSHIBA Power Saver Utility to enable or  
disable this feature. The default is “enabled”.  
Refer to the TOSHIBA Power Saver Utility and  
Panel Power Off/On items in Chapter 1, Special  
features, for details on settings.  
2-8  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Grand Tour  
Do not put a magnetic object close to the switch. The computer will  
automatically enter Hibernation Mode and shut down even if the Panel  
Power Off feature is disabled.  
Display screen  
The LCD screen displays high-contrast text and  
graphics. The available resolution depends on  
the model. With WXGA, you can change the  
resolution between 1280 × 800 pixels. Refer to  
Appendix B, Display Controller and Modes.  
When the computer operates on the AC adaptor  
the LCD screen’s image will be somewhat  
brighter than when it operates on battery power.  
The lower brightness level is intended to save  
battery power.  
System indicators  
LEDs above icons, light when various computer operations are in progress.  
Figure 2-7 System indicators  
DC IN  
The DC IN indicator glows blue when DC power  
is supplied from the AC power adaptor. If the  
adaptor’s output voltage is abnormal or if the  
power supply malfunctions, this indicator flashes  
orange.  
Power  
The Power indicator glows blue when the  
computer is on. If you select Standby from Shut  
Down Windows, this indicator blinking (one  
second on, two seconds off) while the computer  
shuts down. This indicator blinks orange when  
the computer is shut down in Standby mode.  
Battery  
The Battery indicator shows the condition of the  
battery’s charge: Blue indicates full charge,  
orange indicates battery charging and flashing  
orange indicates a low battery charge. Refer to  
Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes.  
HDD  
The HDD indicator glows blue when the  
computer is accessing the built-in hard disk drive.  
Bridge Media  
The Bridge Media indicator glows blue when the  
computer is accessing the Bridge media slot.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-9  
The Grand Tour  
Wireless  
communication  
The Wireless communication indicator glows  
when the Bluetooth and wireless LAN functions  
are turned on.  
All models are provided with a Wireless  
Communication switch although only some  
models are equipped with both Wireless LAN  
and Bluetooth functions.  
Keyboard indicators  
The figures below show the positions of the keypad overlay indicators and  
the Caps Lock indicator.  
When the Arrow mode indicator glows the keypad overlay lets you control  
the cursor.  
When the Numeric mode indicator glows the keypad overlay lets you enter  
numbers.  
When the Caps Lock indicator glows the keyboard is in all-caps mode.  
Caps Lock indicator  
Figure 2-8 Caps Lock indicator  
Caps Lock  
This indicator glows green when the alphabet  
keys are locked in uppercase.  
Arrow mode  
indicator  
Numeric mode  
indicator  
Figure 2-9 Keypad overlay indicators  
2-10  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Grand Tour  
Arrow mode  
When the Arrow mode indicator lights green,  
you can use the keypad overlay (gray labeled  
keys) as cursor keys. Refer to the Keypad  
overlay section in Chapter 5, The Keyboard.  
Numeric mode  
You can use the keypad overlay (gray labeled  
keys) for numeric input when the Numeric mode  
indicator lights green. Refer to the Keypad  
overlay section in Chapter 5, The Keyboard.  
USB floppy disk drive  
The USB floppy disk drive accommodates 1.44-megabyte or 720-kilobyte  
floppy disks and connects to the USB port. It is supplied as standard with  
some models and as an option with others.  
USB connector  
Disk-In-Use  
Indicator  
Floppy disk  
Eject button  
slot  
Figure 2-10 USB floppy disk drive  
USB connector  
Insert this connector into one of the USB ports of  
your computer.  
Disk-In-Use Indicator This indicator lights when the floppy disk is being  
accessed.  
Floppy disk slot  
Eject button  
Insert a floppy disk in this slot.  
When a floppy disk is fully seated in the drive, the  
eject button pops out. To remove a floppy disk,  
push the eject button and the floppy disk pops  
out partially for removal.  
Check the Disk-In-Use indicator when you use the USB floppy disk drive.  
Do not press the eject button or turn off the computer while the light is  
glowing. Doing so could destroy data and damage the floppy disk or the  
drive.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-11  
The Grand Tour  
■ The USB floppy disk drive should be placed on a flat, horizontal surface  
when in use. Do not set the drive on an incline 20o while it is operating.  
■ Do not set anything on top of the floppy disk drive.  
Optical disc drives  
One of the following optical disc drives is installed in the computer: DVD-  
ROM&CD-R/RW and DVD Super Multi drives. An ATAPI interface  
controller is used for CD/DVD-ROM operation. When the computer is  
accessing a CD/DVD, an indicator on the drive glows.  
For information on loading and unloading discs refer to the Using optical  
disc drive section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Region codes for DVD drives and media  
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW, DVD Super Multi drives and media are  
manufactured according to the specifications of six marketing regions.  
When you purchase DVD-Video, make sure it matches your drive,  
otherwise it will not play properly.  
Code  
Region  
1
2
3
4
Canada, United States  
Japan, Europe, South Africa, Middle East  
Southeast Asia, East Asia  
Australia, New Zealand, Pacific Islands, Central  
America, South America, Caribbean  
5
6
Russia, Indian Subcontinent, Africa, North Korea,  
Mongolia  
China  
Writable discs  
This section describes the types of writable CD/DVD discs. Check the  
specifications for your drive to for the type of discs it can write. Use  
TOSHIBA Disc Creator to write compact discs. Refer to Chapter 4,  
Operating Basics.  
CDs  
■ CD-R discs can be written only once. The recorded data cannot be  
erased or changed.  
■ CD-RW discs including multi speed CD-RW discs, high-speed CD-RW  
discs and ultra-speed CD-RW discs can be recorded more than once.  
2-12  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Grand Tour  
DVDs  
■ DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL discs can be written only  
once. The recorded data cannot be erased or changed.  
■ DVD-RW, DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can be recorded more than  
once.  
Formats  
The drives support the following formats:  
■ CD-ROM  
■ DVD-ROM  
■ CD-DA  
■ DVD -Video  
■ CD-Text  
■ CD-ROM Mode 1, Mode 2  
■ Enhanced CD (CD-EXTRA)  
■ Addressing Method 2  
■ DVD-R  
■ Photo CD™  
(single/multi-session)  
■ CD-ROM XA Mode 2  
(Form1, Form2)  
■ DVD-RW  
■ DVD-R DL (Format 1)  
■ DVD+R DL  
■ DVD+R  
■ DVD+RW  
■ DVD-RAM  
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive  
The full-size DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive module lets you record data to  
rewritable CDs as well as run either 12 cm (4.72") or 8 cm (3.15") CD/DVDs  
without using an adaptor.  
The read speed is slower at the center of a disc and faster at the outer  
edge.  
DVD read  
CD read  
8 speed (maximum)  
24 speed (maximum)  
CD-R write  
CD-RW write  
24 speed (maximum)  
24 speed (maximum, Ultra-speed media)  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-13  
The Grand Tour  
DVD Super Multi drive  
The full-size DVD Super Multi drive module lets you record data to  
rewritable CDs as well as run either 12 cm (4.72") or 8 cm (3.15") CD/DVDs  
without using an adaptor.  
The read speed is slower at the center of a disc and faster at the outer  
edge.  
DVD read  
8 speed (maximum)  
DVD-R write  
DVD-R DL write  
DVD-RW write  
DVD+R write  
DVD+R DL  
8 speed (maximum)  
2 speed (maximum)  
4 speed (maximum)  
8 speed (maximum)  
2.4 speed (maximum)  
4 speed (maximum)  
DVD+RW write  
DVD-RAM write  
CD read  
3 speed (maximum)  
24 speed (maximum)  
24 speed (maximum)  
16 speed (maximum, Ultra-speed media)  
CD-R write  
CD-RW write  
2.6GB and 5.2GB DVD-RAM media cannot be read from or written to.  
AC adaptor  
The AC adaptor can automatically adjust to any voltage ranging from 100  
to 240 volts and to a frequency of either 50 or 60 hertz, enabling you to use  
this computer in almost any country/region. The adaptor converts AC  
power to DC power and reduces the voltage supplied to this computer.  
To recharge the battery, simply connect the AC adaptor to a power source  
and the computer. Refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes for  
details.  
Figure 2-11 The AC adaptor (2-pin plug)  
2-14  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Grand Tour  
Figure 2-12 The AC adaptor (3-pin plug)  
■ Depending on the model, a 2-pin plug or 3-pin plug set of the above  
may be bundled.  
■ Do not use a 3-pin to 2-pin conversion plug.  
■ The supplied power cord conforms to safety rules and regulations in  
the region the product is bought and should not be used outside this  
region. For use in other regions, please buy power cords that conform  
to safety rules and regulations in the particular region.  
Always use the Toshiba AC adaptor that was provided with your PC and  
the Toshiba Battery Charger (that may have been provided with your PC),  
or use Toshiba recommended alternate models to avoid any risk of fire or  
other damage to the PC. Use of an incompatible AC adaptor or Battery  
Charger could cause fire or damage to the PC possibly resulting in serious  
injury.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-15  
The Grand Tour  
2-16  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Satellite U200/PORTÉGÉ M500  
Chapter 3  
Getting Started  
This chapter provides basic information to get you started using your  
computer. It covers the following topics:  
■ Setting up your work space - for your health and safety  
Be sure also to read the Instruction Manual for Safety & Comfort. This  
guide, which is included with the computer, explains product liability.  
■ Connecting the AC adaptor  
■ Opening the display  
■ Turning on the power  
■ Starting up for the first time  
■ Turning off the power  
■ Restarting the computer  
■ Creating recovery media  
■ Restoring the preinstalled software from the HDD (Windows XP  
Professional model)  
■ Restoring the preinstalled software from the Recovery Media (Windows  
XP Home Edition model)  
All users should be sure to read the section Starting up for the first time.  
Setting up your work space  
Establishing a comfortable work site is important for you and your  
computer. A poor work environment or stressful work habits can result in  
discomfort or serious injury from repetitive strain to your hands, wrists or  
other joints. Proper ambient conditions should also be maintained for the  
computer’s operation. This section discusses the following topics:  
■ General conditions  
■ Placement of the computer  
■ Seating and posture  
■ Lighting  
■ Work habits  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-1  
Getting Started  
General conditions  
In general, if you are comfortable, so is your computer, but read the  
following to make sure your work site provides a proper environment.  
■ Select a work area that has:  
■ a well-designed and functioning ventilation system that does not  
forcefully direct air on you  
■ good air circulation  
■ a comfortable ambient temperature and relative humidity.  
■ Never place your PC where it will be exposed to excess heat, such as in  
direct sunlight, an unventilated vehicle or near a heater. This may result  
in a system failure, malfunction, loss of data or damage to PC.  
■ Never place your PC in a location where it will be exposed to extremely  
low temperatures. This may result in a system failure, malfunction or  
loss of data.  
■ Never subject your PC to sudden temperature variations. This may  
result in condensation, causing a system failure, malfunction or loss of  
data.  
■ Do not expose your PC to dusty environments. If dust gets inside the  
PC, it could cause a system failure, malfunction or loss of data. If dust  
contaminates the PC, do not turn on the power. Take it to an authorized  
Toshiba service provider before you use it.  
■ Never place your PC near an object that generates a magnetic field,  
such as a speaker or TV. Do not wear magnetic bracelets while using  
your PC. Exposure to magnetic fields can cause system failure,  
malfunction or loss of data.  
■ Never place a heavy object on the PC and be careful not to drop a  
heavy object onto the PC. It could damage the PC or cause system  
failure.  
■ Never use benzene, thinner or other chemicals when cleaning the PC,  
AC adaptor, or storage device. The use of benzene, thinner or other  
chemicals may result in deterioration, deformation or discoloration of  
those items and the loss of data.  
■ Make sure the AC power cord connects to an outlet that is close to the  
computer and easily accessible.  
■ The temperature should be 5 to 35 degrees Centigrade (41 to 95  
degrees Fahrenheit) and the relative humidity should be 20 to 80  
percent.  
■ Keep the computer free of dust, moisture, and exposure to direct  
sunlight.  
■ Some parts of the computer, including data storage media, can be  
damaged by magnets. Do not place the computer near magnetic  
objects or bring magnetic objects close to the computer. Be careful of  
objects, such as stereo speakers, that produce strong magnetic fields  
during operation. Also, be careful with metal objects, such as bracelets,  
which can be inadvertently magnetized.  
■ Do not operate the computer in close proximity to a mobile phone.  
3-2  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
■ Leave ample ventilation room for the fan. Do not block the vents.  
■ If the PC interferes with radio equipment, turn the PC power off  
immediately. Such interference could cause equipment malfunction.  
■ Never place your PC on a shaky table, uneven, tilted surface or other  
unstable location. Your PC may fall, causing damage to the PC or  
possibly injury.  
■ Never leave the power to your PC on continuously for more than 24  
hours. Turn the power off when this product is not in use.  
■ Always avoid abrupt changes of temperature or humidity.  
■ Never place close to heat radiating appliances such as a heater.  
■ Never place close to corrosive chemicals.  
■ Never place close to magnetic field radiating appliances such as a  
stereo speaker.  
■ Always place this product on a flat surface.  
■ Provide a sufficient space behind the PC to allow easy adjustment of  
the display panel.  
■ Always provide sufficient space around the PC to ensure adequate  
ventilation.  
■ Always provide sufficient space for operating a mouse and other  
peripheral devices.  
Placement of the computer  
Position the computer and peripheral devices to provide comfort and  
safety.  
■ Position your LCD display panel or place your monitor in an appropriate  
position to help reduce awkward postures and overhead glare. For  
example:  
■ Position LCD directly in front of you and at a comfortable distance  
away.  
■ Position LCD so the top of the screen is at or slightly below eye  
level. A display screen that is too high or too low can cause  
awkward postures and possibly fatigue muscles that support the  
head.  
■ Rest your eyes periodically by focusing on objects that are farther  
away.  
■ If you use a paper holder, set it at about the same height and distance  
as the computer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-3  
Getting Started  
Seating and posture  
Maintain a comfortable working posture when using your PC where your  
body joints are naturally aligned to reduce stress on different parts of your  
body. Consider the following:  
Below eye level  
90°angles  
Foot rest  
Figure 3-1 Posture and positioning of the computer  
■ Keep hands, wrists, and forearms straight, in-line and roughly parallel to  
the floor.  
■ Keep head level, or bent slightly forward, forward facing, and balanced.  
Generally the head is in-line with the torso.  
■ Keep shoulders relaxed and let upper arms hang normally at the side of  
the body.  
■ Keep elbows in close to the body and bent.  
■ Keep feet fully supported by floor or foot rest.  
■ Keep back fully supported with appropriate lumbar support when sitting  
vertical or leaning back slightly.  
■ Keep thighs and hips supported by a well-padded seat cushion and  
generally parallel to the floor.  
■ Keep knees about the same height as the hips with the feet slightly  
forward.  
3-4  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Lighting  
Select the right level of illumination and place your PC appropriately to  
minimize glare from overhead lights, desk lamps and windows. Glare on  
the LCD or monitor may cause eye strain, eye fatigue or headaches.  
Consider the following suggestions regarding lighting your work  
environment:  
■ Position the PC so that the light source does not shine or reflect directly  
onto the display or shine or reflect directly into the eyes of the user.  
■ Shield the PC from direct light by using tinted windows or by installing  
blinds or a screen.  
■ Use soft, indirect lighting.  
■ Adjust the display panel to provide maximum visibility.  
Work habits  
A key to avoiding discomfort or injury from repetitive strain is to vary your  
activities. If possible, schedule a variety of tasks into your workday. If you  
must spend long periods at the computer, finding ways to break up the  
routine can reduce stress and improve your efficiency.  
■ Sit in a relaxed posture. Good positioning of your chair and equipment  
as described earlier can reduce tension in your shoulders or neck and  
ease back strain.  
■ Vary your posture frequently.  
■ Occasionally stand up and stretch or exercise briefly.  
■ Exercise and stretch your wrists and hands a number of times during  
the day.  
■ Frequently, look away from the computer and focus your eyes on a  
distant object for several seconds, for example 30 seconds every 15  
minutes.  
■ Take frequent short breaks instead of one or two long breaks, for  
example, two or three minutes every half hour.  
■ When you use a PC, rest your eyes periodically and relax or stretch  
your muscles to avoid strain. If you experience discomfort while  
operating the PC, stop immediately and rest. Continuous operation for  
long periods without adequate rest may cause pain in the arms, wrists,  
hands, back, neck or other parts of the body. If pain persists despite  
rest, consult your doctor.  
A number of books are available on ergonomics and repetitive strain injury  
or repetitive stress syndrome. For more information on these topics or for  
pointers on exercises for such stress points as hands and wrists, please  
check with your library or book vendor. Also refer to the computer’s  
Instruction Manual for Safety & Comfort.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-5  
Getting Started  
Strategic Rest Breaks  
Take short, strategically spaced rest breaks to avoid eye strain and body  
discomforts.  
For more specific recommendations on the safety and comfort of your  
computer environment, customers in the United States may visit the United  
States Department of Labor, Occupational Safety & Health Administration  
website at: http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/etools/computerworkstations/  
Other Things to Note  
■ Never turn off the power while an application is running. Doing so could  
cause loss of data.  
■ Use a virus-check program and make sure it is updated regularly.  
■ Never turn off the power, disconnect an external storage device or  
remove storage media during data read/write. Doing so can cause data  
loss.  
■ Never format storage media without checking its content. Formatting  
destroys all stored data.  
■ It is a good idea to periodically back up the internal hard disk or other  
main storage device to external media. General storage media is not  
durable or stable over long periods of time and under certain conditions  
may result in data loss.  
■ Before you install a device or application, save any data in memory to  
the hard disk drive or other storage media. Failure to do so may result in  
the loss of data.  
Connecting the AC adaptor  
Attach the AC adaptor when you need to charge the battery or you want to  
operate from AC power. It is also the fastest way to get started, because  
the battery pack will need to be charged before you can operate from  
battery power.  
The AC adaptor can be connected to any power source supplying from 100  
to 240 volts and 50 or 60 hertz. For details on using the AC adaptor to  
charge the battery pack, refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes.  
3-6  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
■ Always use the Toshiba AC adaptor that was provided with your PC  
and the Toshiba Battery Charger (that may have been provided with  
your PC), or use Toshiba recommended alternate models to avoid any  
risk of fire or other damage to the PC. Use of an incompatible AC  
adaptor or Battery Charger could cause fire or damage to the PC  
possibly resulting in serious injury.  
■ Use only the AC adaptor supplied with your computer or an equivalent  
adaptor that is compatible. Use of any incompatible adaptor could  
damage your computer. TOSHIBA assumes no liability for any damage  
caused by use of an incompatible adaptor.  
■ Never plug the AC adaptor or Battery Charger into a power source that  
does not correspond to both the voltage and the frequency specified on  
the regulatory label of the unit. Failure to do so could result in a fire or  
electric shock, possibly resulting in serious injury.  
■ Always use or purchase power cables that comply with the legal  
voltage and frequency specifications and requirements in the country  
of use. Failure to do so could result in a fire or electric shock, possibly  
resulting in serious injury.  
■ The supplied power cord conforms to safety rules and regulations in  
the region the product is bought and should not be used outside this  
region. For use in other regions, please buy power cords that conform  
to safety rules and regulations in the particular region.  
■ Do not use a 3-pin to 2-pin conversion plug.  
■ When you connect the AC adaptor to the computer, always follow the  
steps in the exact order as described in the User’s Manual. Connecting  
the power cable to a live electrical outlet should be the last step  
otherwise the adaptor DC output plug could hold an electrical change  
and cause an electrical shock or minor bodily injury when touched. As  
a general safety precaution, avoid touching any metal parts.  
■ Never place an AC adaptor on a wooden surface, furniture, or any  
other surface that could be marred by exposure to heat since the AC  
adaptor's surface temperature increases during normal use.  
■ Always place the PC on a suitable heat-insulating material to prevent  
possible heat damage.  
1. Connect the power cord to the AC adaptor.  
Figure 3-2 Connecting the power cord to the AC adaptor (2-pin plug)  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-7  
Getting Started  
Figure 3-3 Connecting the power cord to the AC adaptor (3-pin plug)  
Depending on the model, a 2-pin or 3-pin plug set of the above may be  
bundled.  
2. Connect the AC adaptor’s DC output plug to the DC IN 15V jack on the  
left side of the computer.  
DC IN 15V jack  
Figure 3-4 Connecting the adaptor to the computer  
3. Plug the power cord into a live wall outlet. The Battery and DC IN  
indicators on the front of the computer should glow.  
Opening the display  
The computer’s LCD display panel can be opened in a wide range of  
angles for optimal viewing.  
1. Slide the display latch on the front of the computer to unlatch the  
display panel.  
3-8  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
2. While holding down the palm rest with one hand so that the main body  
is not raised, lift the panel slowly. Adjust the angle of the panel to  
provide optimal clarity.  
Be careful not to open the display panel too far as this could put stress on  
the display panel’s hinges and cause damage.  
Use reasonable care when opening and closing the LCD display panel.  
Opening it vigorously or slamming it shut could damage the computer.  
LCD display panel  
Display latch  
Figure 3-5 Opening the LCD display panel  
Turning on the power  
This section describes how to turn on the power.  
■ After you turn on the power for the first time, do not turn it off until you  
have set up the operating system. Refer to the section Starting up for  
the first time.  
■ If the USB floppy disk drive is connected, make sure it is empty. If a  
floppy disk is in the drive, press the eject button and remove the floppy  
disk.  
1. Open the computer’s LCD display panel.  
2. Press and hold the computer’s power button for two or three seconds.  
Power button  
Figure 3-6 Turning on the power  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-9  
Getting Started  
Starting up for the first time  
When you first turn on the power, the computer’s initial screen is the  
Microsoft Windows XP Startup Screen Logo. Follow the on-screen  
directions for each screen. During setup, you can click the Back button to  
return to the previous screen.  
Be sure to read the Windows End User License Agreementdisplay  
carefully.  
Turning off the power  
The power can be turned off in one of the following modes: Shut down  
(Boot), Hibernation or Standby Mode.  
Shut Down mode (Boot mode)  
When you turn off the power in Shut Down mode no data is saved and the  
computer will boot to the operating system’s main screen.  
1. If you have entered data, save it to the hard disk or to a storage media.  
2. Make sure all disk (disc) activity has stopped, then remove the  
CD/DVDs or floppy disk.  
■ Make sure the HDD indicator is off. If you turn off the power while a  
disk (disc) is being accessed, you can lose data or damage the disk  
(disc).  
■ Never turn off the power while an application is running. Doing so could  
cause loss of data.  
■ Never turn off the power, disconnect an external storage device or  
remove storage media during data read/write. Doing so can cause data  
loss.  
3. Click start then click Turn Off Computer. From the Turn Off  
Computer menu select Turn Off.  
4. Turn off the power to any peripheral devices.  
Do not turn the computer or devices back on immediately. Wait a moment  
to let all capacitors fully discharge.  
Standby Mode  
If you have to interrupt your work, you can turn off the power without exiting  
from your software. Data is maintained in the computer’s main memory.  
When you turn on the power again, you can continue working right where  
you left off.  
3-10  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
■ When the AC adaptor is connected, the computer will go into Standby  
Mode according to the settings in the TOSHIBA Power Saver utility.  
■ To restore operation from Standby Mode, press the power button or  
press any key. The latter action only works on the internal keyboard if  
the Wake-up on Keyboard option is enabled in HW Setup.  
■ If the computer automatically enters Standby Mode while a network  
application is active, the application might not be restored when the  
computer wakes up from Standby.  
■ To prevent the computer from automatically entering Standby Mode,  
disable Standby in TOSHIBA Power Saver. That action, however, will  
nullify the computer’s Energy Star compliance.  
■ Before entering Standby Mode, be sure to save your data.  
■ Do not install or remove a memory module while the computer is in  
Standby Mode. The computer or the module could be damaged.  
■ Do not remove the battery pack while the computer is in Standby Mode  
(unless the computer is connected to an AC power source). Data in  
memory will be lost.  
■ If you carry the computer on board an aircraft or into a hospital, be sure  
to shut down the computer in Hibernation Mode or in shutdown mode  
to avoid radio signal interference.  
Benefits of standby  
The standby feature provides the following benefits:  
■ Restores the previous working environment more rapidly than does  
hibernation.  
■ Saves power by shutting down the system when the computer receives  
no input or hardware access for the duration set by the System Standby  
feature.  
■ You can use the panel power off feature.  
Executing standby  
You can also enable Standby by pressing Fn + F3. Refer to Chapter 5, The  
Keyboard, for details.  
You can enter Standby Mode in one of three ways:  
1. Click start, click Turn Off Computer and click Stand By.  
2. Close the computer’s LCD display panel. This feature must be enabled.  
Refer to the Setup Actions tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver Utility  
described in the Control Panel.  
Open Performance and Maintenance and open TOSHIBA Power  
Saver.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-11  
Getting Started  
3. Press the power button. This feature must be enabled. Refer to the  
Setup Actions tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver Utility described in the  
Control Panel.  
Open Performance and Maintenance and open TOSHIBA Power  
Saver.  
When you turn the power back on, you can continue where you left when  
you shut down the computer.  
■ When the computer is shut down in Standby Mode, the power indicator  
blinking orange.  
■ If you are operating the computer on battery power, you can lengthen  
the operating time by shutting down in Hibernation Mode. Standby  
Mode consumes more power.  
Standby limitations  
Standby will not function under the following conditions:  
■ Power is turned back on immediately after shutting down.  
■ Memory circuits are exposed to static electricity or electrical noise.  
Hibernation Mode  
The Hibernation Mode feature saves the contents of memory to the hard  
disk when the computer is turned off. The next time the computer is turned  
on, the previous state is restored. The Hibernation Mode feature does not  
save the status of any peripheral devices.  
■ Save your data. While entering Hibernation Mode, the computer saves  
the contents of memory to the hard disk drive. However, for safety  
sake, it is best to save your data manually.  
■ Data will be lost if you remove the battery or disconnect the AC adaptor  
before the save is completed. Wait for the HDD indicator to go out.  
■ Do not install or remove a memory module while the computer is in  
Hibernation Mode. Data will be lost.  
Benefits of Hibernation Mode  
The Hibernation Mode feature provides the following benefits:  
■ Saves data to the hard disk when the computer automatically shuts  
down because of a low battery.  
For the computer to shut down in Hibernation Mode, this feature must be  
enabled in two places: the Hibernate tab in Power Options and Setup  
Actions tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver.  
If you do not configure this feature, the computer will shut down in Standby  
Mode - if battery power becomes depleted, data saved in Standby Mode  
will be lost.  
■ You can return to your previous working environment immediately when  
you turn on the computer.  
3-12  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
■ Saves power by shutting down the system when the computer receives  
no input or hardware access for the duration set by the System  
hibernate feature.  
■ You can use the panel power off feature.  
Starting Hibernation Mode  
You can also enable Hibernation Mode by pressing Fn + F4. Refer to  
Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for details.  
To enter Hibernation Mode, follow the steps below.  
1. Click start.  
2. Select Turn Off Computer.  
3. Open the Turn Off Computer dialog box.  
4. Click Hibernate.  
Automatic Hibernation  
The computer will enter Hibernate mode automatically when you press the  
power button or close the lid. First, however, make the appropriate settings  
according to the steps below.  
1. Click start and open the Control Panel.  
2. Open Performance and Maintenance and open Power Options.  
3. Select the Hibernate window in the Power Options Properties,  
select the Enable hibernation check box and click the Apply button.  
4. Open TOSHIBA Power Saver.  
5. Select the Setup Action window.  
6. Enable the desired Hibernation settings for When I press the power  
button and When I close the lid.  
7. Click the OK button.  
Data save in Hibernation Mode  
When you turn off the power in Hibernation Mode, the computer takes a  
moment to save current memory data to the hard disk. During this time, the  
HDD indicator will light.  
After you turn off the computer, and the content of memory has been saved  
to the hard disk, turn off the power to any peripheral devices.  
Do not turn the computer or devices back on immediately. Wait a moment  
to let all capacitors fully discharge.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-13  
Getting Started  
Restarting the computer  
Certain conditions require that you reset the system. For example, if:  
■ You change certain computer settings.  
■ An error occurs and the computer does not respond to your keyboard  
commands.  
■ There are three ways to reset the computer system:  
1. Click start then click Turn off computer. From the Turn off  
computer menu select Restart.  
2. Press Ctrl + Alt + Del to display the Windows Task Manager, then  
select Shut Down and Restart.  
3. Press the power button and hold it down for five seconds. Wait 10 to 15  
seconds, then turn the power on again by pressing the power button.  
Create Optical Recovery Discs  
This function is only in Windows XP Professional model.  
A recovery image of your computer is stored on the hard disk. You may use  
this image to create CD or DVD recovery discs using the following steps:  
1. Select either blank CDs or DVD media.  
2. The application will allow you to choose a type of media to create  
recovery CDs/DVD including: CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-  
RW, DVD+R, DVD+R DL and DVD+RW.  
Some media may not be compatible with the optical disc drive of your  
computer. Please verify your optical disc drive supports the blank media  
you choose.  
3. Turn on your computer without a PC card storage device such as HDD  
to open Windows XP.  
4. Insert the (first) blank media into the tray of the optical disc drive.  
5. Double click the TOSHIBA Recovery Disc Creator Launcher icon on the  
Windows XP desktop, or Select the application from start Menu.  
6. After Recovery Disc Creator starts, select the type of media and the title  
you wish to copy to the media then click the Create button.  
3-14  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Creating the Optical Recovery Disc of Express Media  
Player  
This function is only in Windows XP Home Edition model.  
You may use this image to create CD recovery disc using the following  
steps:  
1. The application will allow you to choose a type of media to create  
recovery CD including: CD-R, CD-RW.  
Some media may not be compatible with the optical disc drive of your  
computer. Please verify your optical disc drive supports the blank media  
you choose.  
2. Turn on your computer to open Windows XP.  
3. Insert the blank media into the tray of the optical disc drive.  
4. After TOSHIBA Recovery Disc Creator starts, select the Express  
Media Player (Recovery CD) then click the Create button.  
Restoring the preinstalled software from the  
Recovery HDD  
This function is only in Windows XP Professional model.  
About 2.5GB of hard disk space is reserved for recovery partition.  
When re-setting up your hard disk, do not change, delete or add partitions  
in a manner other than specified in the manual. Otherwise, space for  
software may be destroyed.  
In addition, if you use a third-party partitioning program to reconfigure  
partitions on your hard disk, it may become impossible to re-setup your  
computer.  
When sound mute is turned ON by the Fn + Esc key, turn OFF before  
starting restore. Refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for details.  
1. Turn off your computer.  
2. While holding down 0 (zero) key on the keyboard, turn on your  
computer.  
3. A menu appears follow the on-screen instructions.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-15  
Getting Started  
Restoring the preinstalled software  
If preinstalled files are damaged, you can either use the Recovery Media  
you have created(*1), the hard disk drive recovery(*1) or the Product  
Recovery Media(*2) to restore them. To restore the operating system and  
all preinstalled software, follow the steps below.  
(*1) Windows XP Professional model  
(*2) Windows XP Home Edition model  
When sound mute is turned ON by the Fn + Esc key, turn OFF before  
starting restore. Refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for details.  
When you reinstall the Windows operating system, the hard disk will be  
reformatted and all data will be lost.  
1. Load the Recovery Media in the optional optical disc drive and turn off  
the computer’s power.  
2. Hold down the F12 key and turn on the power. When In Touch with  
Tomorrow TOSHIBAappears, release the F12 key.  
3. Use the left or right cursor key to select the CD-ROM icon in the display  
menu. For details, refer to the Boot Priority section in Chapter 7, HW  
Setup.  
4. A menu appears follow the on-screen instructions.  
3-16  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Satellite U200/PORTÉGÉ M500  
Chapter 4  
Operating Basics  
This chapter describes the basic operations of your computer and  
precautions when using it, as well as the handling of CD/DVD.  
Using the Touch Pad  
To use the Touch Pad, simply touch and move your fingertip across it in the  
direction you want the on-screen pointer to go.  
Fingerprint  
Sensor  
Touch Pad  
Touch Pad  
control buttons  
Figure 4-1 Touch Pad and Touch Pad control buttons  
Two buttons below the Touch Pad are used like the buttons on a mouse  
pointer. Press the left button to select a menu item or to manipulate text or  
graphics designated by the pointer. Press the right button to display a  
menu or other function depending on the software you are using.  
You can also tap the Touch Pad to perform functions similar to those of the  
left button.  
Click: Tap once  
Double-click: Tap twice  
Drag and drop: Tap to select the material you want to move. Leave  
your finger on the Touch Pad after the second tap and move the  
material.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-1  
Operating Basics  
Using the Fingerprint Sensor  
This product has a Fingerprint Utility installed for the purpose of enrolling  
and recognizing fingerprints. By enrolling the ID and password to the  
fingerprint authentication device, it is no longer necessary to input the  
password from the keyboard. Just by swiping the finger against the  
fingerprint sensor, the following functions will be enabled:  
■ Logon to Windows and access a security-enabled homepage through  
IE (Internet Explorer).  
■ Files and folders can be encrypted/decrypted and third party access to  
them prevented.  
■ Disable the password-protected screen-saver when returning from  
power-saving (standby) mode.  
■ Power-on Security and Single Sign-on feature.  
■ Authentication of the User Password and Hard Disk Drive Password  
when booting up the computer.  
Fingerprint cannot be used in models that do not have a fingerprint module  
installed.  
Points to note about the Fingerprint Sensor  
Failure to follow these guidelines might result in (1) damage to the sensor  
or cause sensor failure, (2) finger recognition problems, or lower finger  
recognition success rate.  
■ Do not scratch or poke the sensor with your nails or any hard or sharp  
objects.  
■ Do not press the sensor strongly.  
■ Do not touch the sensor with a wet finger or any wet objects. Keep  
sensor surface dry and free of water vapor.  
■ Do not touch the sensor with a soiled finger. Minute foreign particles on  
a soiled or dirty finger may scratch the sensor.  
■ Do not paste stickers or write on the sensor.  
■ Do not touch the sensor with a finger or any object that has a built-up of  
static electricity on it.  
Observe the following before you place your finger on the sensor whether  
for fingerprint enrollment/registration or recognition.  
■ Wash and dry your hands thoroughly.  
■ Remove static electricity from your fingers by touching any metal  
surface. Static electricity is a common cause of sensor failures,  
especially when the weather is dry.  
■ Clean the sensor with a lint-free cloth. Do not use detergent to clean the  
sensor.  
■ Avoid the following finger conditions for enrollment or recognition as  
they may result in fingerprint enrollment errors or a drop in the  
fingerprint recognition success rate  
4-2  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Basics  
■ Soaked or swollen finger (e.g. after taking bath)  
■ Injured finger  
■ Wet finger  
■ Soiled or oily finger  
■ Extremely dry skin condition on finger  
Observe the following to improve the fingerprint recognition success rate.  
■ Enroll two or more fingers.  
■ Enroll additional fingers if recognition failure occurs often using enrolled  
fingers.  
■ Check your finger condition. Changed conditions, such as injured,  
rough, extremely dry, wet, soiled, dirty, oily, soaked, swollen fingers,  
may lower the recognition success rate. Also if the fingerprint is worn  
down or the finger becomes thinner or fatter, the recognition success  
rate may be lowered.  
■ The fingerprint for each finger is different and unique. Please ensure  
that only the registered or enrolled fingerprint or fingerprints are used  
for identification.  
■ Check sliding position and speed (see the drawing below).  
How to Delete the Fingerprint Data  
Saved fingerprint data is stored in the Non-volatile memory inside the  
fingerprint sensor. If you hand over the PC to others, or dispose of it, to do  
the following operations is recommended.  
1. Click start, point to All Programs, point to Protector Suite QL and  
click Control Center.  
2. The Protector Suite Software screen is displayed.  
3. Click Fingerprints and click Delete.  
4. Click Settings and click Fingerprint Storage Inspector.  
5. The Fingerprint Storage Inspector screen is displayed. If other  
fingerprint data is still displayed on the list. Select all fingerprint data  
and click remove.  
6. Check whether all fingerprint data was deleted on the fingerprint  
Storage inspector screen.  
Fingerprint Sensor Limitations.  
■ The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes the unique  
characteristics in a fingerprint.  
■ A warning message will be displayed when recognition is abnormal or  
recognition is not successful within a fixed duration.  
■ The recognition success rate may differ from user to user.  
■ Toshiba does not guarantee that this fingerprint recognition technology  
will be error-free.  
■ Toshiba does not guarantee that the fingerprint sensor will recognize  
the enrolled user or accurately screen out unauthorized users at all  
times. Toshiba is not liable for any failure or damage that might arise  
out of the use of this fingerprint recognition software or utility.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3  
Operating Basics  
The following illustrations show the correct way to swipe your finger over  
the recognition sensor.  
Align your fingertip with the sensor as shown in the drawing and swipe.  
Points to note about the Fingerprint Utility  
Backups for saved fingerprint data and saved information in the  
PasswordBank can be performed in Import or Export User Data under  
Fingerprint Software Management. However, encrypted files cannot be  
backuped within Mysafe with this function. Recommended action is  
backing up encrypted files to external media with standard methods such  
as copying files.  
If Windows XP’s file encryption function EFS (Encryption File System) is  
used to encrypt a file, the file cannot be further encrypted using the  
encryption function of this software.  
If the fingerprint sensor and Trusted Platform Module (TPM) security are  
used as identification devices, install and configure the Infineon TPM  
Professional package first before configuring the Fingerprint Utility. Please  
refer to the TPM (Trusted Platform Module) Installation Guide for the  
installation and configuration methods for TPM.  
In the help file, it is stated that this software's PasswordBank function can  
be used for the Internet and general applications. However, the Internet  
PasswordBank function in the Fingerprint Utility provided in this computer  
can only be used with IE (Internet Explorer).  
Set Up Procedure  
Please use the following procedure when first using fingerprint  
authentication.  
Fingerprint Registration  
Enroll the required authentication data using the User Enrollment Wizard.  
■ The fingerprint authentication uses the same Windows logon ID and  
password. If the Windows logon password has not been setup, please  
do so before registration.  
■ Up to 21 fingerprint patterns can be registered on this sensor.  
4-4  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Basics  
1. Click start, point to All Programs, point to Protector Suite QL and  
click User Enrollment Wizard.  
You can also start User Enrollment Wizard using the following method.  
■ Click the Protector Suite QL icon in the Task Bar.  
■ Swipe your finger across the Fingerprint Sensor.  
2. Click Next.  
3. The User’s Password screen is displayed. Ensure the same Windows  
logon username is displayed before entering a password into the Enter  
your password field. Click Next.  
4. The Hints for Fingerprint Enrollment screen is displayed.  
Confirm the message and that there is a checkmark in Run Interactive  
Tutorial, and click Next.  
5. The Correct Swipe Procedure screen is displayed.  
Confirm the message and click Next.  
6. The Scanning Practice screen is displayed.  
You can practice swiping your finger when you have finished practicing  
swiping your finger, click Next.  
7. The User's Fingers screen is displayed.  
Based on the illustration, after selecting the finger to be registered,  
“Swipe Finger” dialog box will be displayed; swipe the finger to be  
registered 3 times.  
If registration is successful a fingerprint mark will appear above the  
registered finger in the illustration.  
To register another finger, select that finger and repeat the registration  
process.  
To end the fingerprint registration process click Next.  
8. The Advanced Security screen is displayed.  
Select whether to enable the security function, and click Next.  
9. The Finalization screen is displayed. Click Finish. This completes the  
fingerprint registration process.  
Window Logon via Fingerprint Authentication  
In place of the usual Windows logon by ID and password, fingerprint  
authentication also allows logon to Windows.  
This is useful especially when many users are using the same computer as  
it allows the user selection screen to be skipped.  
Fingerprint Authentication Procedure  
1. Start up the computer.  
2. The Logon Authorization screen is displayed. Choose any of the  
enrolled fingers and swipe the fingerprint on the sensor.  
If authentication is successful, the user will be logged on to Windows.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-5  
Operating Basics  
If the fingerprint authentication fails, please logon using the Windows logon  
password.  
Please logon using the Windows logon password if the fingerprint  
authentication failed for three consecutive tries. To logon using the  
Windows logon password, enter the Windows logon password at the  
"Welcome" screen as normal.  
A warning message will be displayed when authentication is abnormal or  
authentication is not successful within a fixed duration.  
Fingerprint Power-on Security  
General  
The fingerprint authentication system can be used to replace the keyboard-  
based User/BIOS Password authentication system when booting up.  
If you do not want to use the fingerprint authentication system for password  
authentication when booting up, but prefer to use the keyboard-based  
system instead, press the BkSP (backspace) key when the Fingerprint  
Power-on Security screen is displayed. This will switch the password input  
screen to the keyboard-based one.  
■ It is necessary to register the User Password before using the  
Fingerprint Power-on Security and its extended function, the  
Fingerprint Single Sign-On Feature. Please use TOSHIBA Password  
Utility to register the User Password.  
■ If you fail fingerprint authentication more than five times, you must  
enter the User Password or Supervisor Password manually to start the  
computer.  
■ When swiping, please do it slowly and at a constant speed. If this does  
not improve the authentication rate, please adjust the speed.  
■ If there are any changes in the environment or settings related to  
authorization, you will be required to provide authorization information  
such as the User Password and HDD Password (Windows XP  
Professional model only).  
How to Enable Fingerprint Power-on Security Settings  
It is necessary to first enroll your fingerprint with the Protector Suite QL  
application prior to enabling and configuring the Fingerprint Power-on  
Security System. Check that your fingerprint is enrolled before configuring  
the settings. See Manual for Fingerprint Registration/Enrollment  
instructions.  
1. Swipe your finger across the Fingerprint Sensor.  
2. MENU appears in the lower right corner of the screen. Swipe your  
finger on the Fingerprint Sensor, and select Control Center from the  
MENU items.  
3. The Fingerprint Software Management screen is displayed. Click  
Settings and click Power-on Security.  
4-6  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Basics  
4. The Power-on Security screen is displayed. Place a checkmark in  
Replace the power-on and hard drive passwords with the fingerprint  
reader and click OK.  
Fingerprint Single Sign-On Feature  
General  
This is a feature that allows the user to complete the authentication for both  
the User/BIOS Password (and optionally, HDD Password) and logging on  
to Windows using only one fingerprint authentication when booting up. It is  
necessary to register the User/BIOS Password and Windows Logon  
Password before using the Fingerprint Power-on Security and this  
Fingerprint Single Sign-On Feature. Please use TOSHIBA Password Utility  
to register your User/BIOS Password. If Windows Logon is not the default  
for your system, see Manual to register your Windows Logon Password.  
Only one fingerprint authentication is required to replace the User/BIOS  
Password (and, if selected, HDD Password) and Windows Logon  
Password.  
How to Enable Fingerprint Single Sign-On Feature  
It is necessary to first enroll your fingerprint with the Protector Suite QL  
application prior to enabling and configuring the How to Enable Fingerprint  
Single Sign-on Feature. Check that the fingerprint is enrolled before  
configuring the settings. See Manual for Fingerprint Registration/  
Enrollment instructions.  
1. Swipe your finger across the Fingerprint Sensor.  
2. MENU appears in the lower right corner of the screen. Swipe your  
finger on the Fingerprint Sensor, and select Control Center from the  
MENU items.  
3. The Fingerprint Software Management screen is displayed.  
Click Settings and click System Settings.  
4. The Protector suite settings screen is displayed. Place a checkmark  
in Allow power-on security single sign-on within Enable logon support  
and click OK.  
Fingerprint Utility limitations  
TOSHIBA does not guarantee that the Fingerprint Utility technology will be  
completely secure or error-free. TOSHIBA does not guarantee that the  
Fingerprint Utility will accurately screen out unauthorized users at all times.  
TOSHIBA is not liable for any failure or damage that might arise out of the  
use of the fingerprint software or utility.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-7  
Operating Basics  
How to Swipe the Finger  
Using the following steps when swiping fingers for fingerprint registration or  
authentication will help to minimize authentication failures:  
1. Align the first joint of the finger to the center of the sensor. Lightly touch  
the sensor and swipe finger levelly towards you.  
While lightly touching the sensor, swipe the finger towards you until the  
sensor surface becomes visible.  
Ensure the center of the fingerprint is on the sensor when swiping the  
finger.  
■ Avoid swiping with the finger stiff or pressed-on too hard  
Fingerprint reading may fail if the center of the fingerprint is not  
touching on the sensor, or when finger is swiped while pressing hard.  
Make sure that the center of the fingerprint is touching the sensor  
before swiping.  
■ Confirm the center of the fingerprint whirl before swiping.  
Always confirm the center of the fingerprint whirl so that it is swiped  
along the center line of the sensor.  
■ When fingerprint reading is not successful  
There is a possibility of authentication failures if the finger is swiped too  
quickly or too slowly. Follow the onscreen instructions to adjust the  
speed of the swipe.  
Front operation buttons  
This section describes the front operation buttons.  
Please do not press the buttons too strenuously.  
Two or Six buttons are available for use:  
Two buttons model: TOSHIBA Assist, TOSHIBA Presentation.  
Six buttons model: Internet, CD/DVD, Play/Pause, Stop, Previous, Next.  
These buttons allow you to manage Audio/Video functions, run applications  
and access utilities.  
Figure 4-2 Front operation buttons: Two buttons model  
Figure 4-3 Front operation buttons: Six buttons model  
4-8  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Basics  
TOSHIBA Assist  
button  
*TOSHIBA Assist button is provided with some  
models.  
Press this button to launch the program  
automatically. When power-off, stand-by and  
hibernation, press this button to start the  
computer and launch the program.  
You can select the function on TOSHIBA  
Controls properties.  
The default is TOSHIBA Assist.  
TOSHIBA  
Presentation button  
*TOSHIBA Presentation button is provided with  
some models.  
Press this button to change internal display,  
simultaneous display, or multi-monitor display.  
The default setting is the simultaneous display on  
LCD and CRT with resolution of 1024 × 768.  
When you press this button twice, the display  
mode returns to single display on LCD only.  
Setting of multi-monitor display in Windows XP,  
computer changes its display mode to the  
multimonitor display on LCD and CRT. You can  
also return to single display by pressing this  
button twice.  
The setting of TOSHIBA Presentation button can  
be changed through the properties of TOSHIBA  
Controls. Display mode is changed to the  
multimonitor display by selecting "Different  
Image" (Windows XP only) or to the  
simultaneous display on internal and external  
display by selecting "Same Image".  
Internet button  
*Internet button is provided with some models.  
Press this button to launch an Internet browser. If  
the computer’s power is off, you can press this  
button to turn on the computer’s power and  
launch the browser automatically in one step.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-9  
Operating Basics  
CD/DVD button  
*CD/DVD button is provided with some models.  
Pressing this button will launch an application  
program that allows for watching CD/DVD.  
An application that is launched differs by a  
model:  
■ Express Media Player  
■ Windows Media Player  
Pressing this button in the power-off condition  
will run Express Media Player. Once Express  
Media Player is launched, and the front operation  
button is enables. Meanwhile, when Express  
Media Player is running, pressing this button will  
do nothing. Pressing this button in the power-on  
or standby conditions will launch Windows Media  
Player/WinDVD.  
Play/Pause button  
*Play/Pause button is provided with some  
models.  
Press this button to begin or pause play.  
Press this button to run Windows Media Player/  
WinDVD. When Windows Media Player/WinDVD  
was already running, this button becomes to  
Play/Pause function.  
STOP button  
Previous button  
Next button  
*STOP button is provided with some models.  
Press this button to stop playing a track or  
chapter.  
*Previous button is provided with some models.  
Press this button to move to the previous audio  
track, DVD chapter.  
*Next button is provided with some models.  
Press this button to move to the next audio track,  
DVD chapter.  
4-10  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Basics  
Using the USB floppy disk drive  
The USB floppy disk drive accommodates 1.44-megabyte or 720-kilobyte  
floppy disks and connects to the USB port. Refer to Chapter 2, The Grand  
Tour, for more information. It is supplied as standard with some models and  
as an option with others.  
Connecting the USB floppy disk drive  
To connect the drive, plug the floppy disk drive’s USB connector into a  
computer’s USB port.  
Make sure the USB connector is properly aligned with the socket. Do not  
try to force the connection, doing so can damage the connecting pins.  
USB port  
USB connector  
Figure 4-4 Connecting the USB floppy disk drive  
If you connect the USB floppy disk drive after turning on the computer, it  
will take about 10 seconds for the computer to recognize the drive. Do not  
disconnect and reconnect before 10 seconds has elapsed.  
Disconnecting USB floppy disk drive  
When you have finished using the USB floppy disk drive, follow the  
procedures below to disconnect it:  
1. Wait for the indicator light to go out to make sure all floppy disk activity  
has stopped.  
If you disconnect the USB floppy disk drive or turn off the power while the  
computer is accessing the drive you may lose data or damage the floppy  
disk or the drive.  
2. Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Task Bar.  
3. Click USB floppy disk drive device that you want remove.  
4. Pull the floppy disk drive’s USB connector out of the computer’s USB  
port.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-11  
Operating Basics  
Using optical disc drives  
The full-size drive provides high-performance execution of CD/DVD-ROM-  
based programs. You can run either 12 cm (4.72") or 8 cm (3.15") CD/  
DVDs without an adaptor. An ATAPI interface controller is used for CD/  
DVD-ROM operation. When the computer is accessing a CD/DVD-ROM,  
an indicator on the drive glows.  
Use the WinDVD application to view DVD-Video discs.  
If you have a DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive, refer also to the Writing CDs on  
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive section for precautions on writing to CDs.  
If you have a DVD Super Multi drive, refer also to the Writing CD/DVDs on  
DVD Super Multi drive section for precautions on writing to CDs/DVDs.  
When the power of the optical disc drive is off, pressing the Fn + Tab keys  
will turn the power of the optical disc drive on. Furthermore, it is possible to  
set it to turn the power of the optical disc drive on and eject the tray at the  
same time.  
Loading discs  
To load CD/DVDs, follow the steps below.  
1. When the computer’s power is on, press the eject button to open  
the disc tray slightly.  
Eject button  
Figure 4-5 Pressing the eject button  
4-12  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Basics  
2. Grasp the disc tray gently and pull until it is fully opened.  
Disc tray  
Figure 4-6 Pulling the disc tray open  
3. Lay the CD/DVD, label side up, in the disc tray.  
Laser lens  
Figure 4-7 Inserting a CD/DVD  
When the disc tray is fully opened, the edge of the computer will extend  
slightly over the CD/DVD tray. Therefore, you will need to turn the CD/DVD  
at an angle when you place it in the disc tray. After seating the CD/DVD,  
however, make sure it lies flat, as shown in figure 4-8.  
■ Do not touch a laser lens and its circumference portion. Doing so could  
cause misalignment.  
■ Prevent foreign objects from entering the drive. Check the surface of  
the disc tray, especially the area behind the front edge of the disc tray,  
to make sure there are no such objects before closing the drive.  
4. Press gently at the center of the CD/DVD until you feel it click into  
place. The CD/DVD should lie below the top of the spindle, flush with  
the spindle base.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-13  
Operating Basics  
5. Push the center of the disc tray to close it. Press gently until it locks into  
place.  
If the CD/DVD is not seated properly when the disc tray is closed, the CD/  
DVD might be damaged. Also, the disc tray might not open fully when you  
press the eject button.  
Figure 4-8 Closing the CD/DVD disc tray  
Removing discs  
To remove the CD/DVD, follow the steps below.  
Do not press the eject button while the computer is accessing the media  
drive. Wait for the optical disc drive indicator to go out before you open the  
disc tray. Also, if the CD/DVD is spinning when you open the disc tray, wait  
for it to stop before you remove it.  
1. To pop the disc tray partially open, press the eject button. Gently pull  
the disc tray out until it is fully opened.  
When the disc tray pops open slightly, wait a moment to make sure the  
CD/DVD has stopped spinning before pulling the disc tray fully open.  
4-14  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Basics  
2. The CD/DVD extends slightly over the sides of the disc tray so you can  
hold it. Hold the CD/DVD gently and lift it out.  
Figure 4-9 Removing a CD/DVD  
3. Push the center of the disc tray to close it. Press gently until it locks into  
place.  
How to remove CD/DVD when the disc tray will not open  
Pressing the eject button will not open the disc tray when the computer  
power is off. If the power is off, you can open the disc tray by inserting a  
slender object (about 15 mm) such as a straightened paper clip into the  
eject hole near the eject button.  
Eject hole  
15mm  
Figure 4-10 Manual release with the eject hole  
Turn off the power before you use the eject hole. If the CD/DVD is spinning  
when you open the disc tray, the CD/DVD could fly off the spindle and  
cause injury.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-15  
Operating Basics  
Writing CDs on DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive  
Depending on the type of drive installed, you may be able to write CDs. The  
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive lets you write as well as read CD-ROMs.  
Observe the precautions in this section to ensure the best performance for  
writing CDs. For information on loading and unloading CDs refer to the  
Using optical disc drives section.  
■ Refer to the Writable discs, section in Chapter 2 for details about the  
types of writable CD/DVD discs.  
■ Do not turn off the power of the optical disc drive while the computer is  
accessing the drive. If you turn off the power, you may lose data.  
■ When the power of the optical disc drive is off, the disc tray will not  
open even if the eject button is pressed. Use the optical disc drive  
power icon to turn the power of the optical disc drive on. Refer to  
Chapter 1, Special features.  
When writing to media using an optical disc drive, always connect the AC  
adaptor to a power plug socket. If data is written while powered by the  
battery pack, writing may sometimes fail due to low battery power and data  
loss may occur.  
Before writing or rewriting  
Please observe the following points when you write or rewrite the data.  
■ We recommend the following manufacturers of CD-R and CD-RW  
media. Media quality can affect write or rewrite success rates.  
CD-R:  
TAIYO YUDEN CO., LTD.  
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION  
RICOH Co., Ltd.  
Multi-Speed and High-Speed CD-RW:  
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION  
RICOH Co., Ltd.  
Ultra-Speed CD-RW:  
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION  
TOSHIBA has confirmed the operation of CD-R and CD-RW media of the  
manufacturers above. Operation of other media cannot be guaranteed.  
■ The actual number of rewrites to CD-RW is affected by the quality of the  
disc and the way it is used.  
■ Be sure to connect the AC adaptor when you write or rewrite.  
■ Be sure to close all other software programs except the writing  
software.  
4-16  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Basics  
■ Do not run software such as a screen saver which can put a heavy load  
on the CPU.  
■ Operate the computer at full power. Do not use power-saving features.  
■ Do not write while virus check software is running. Wait for it to finish,  
then disable virus detection programs including any software that  
checks files automatically in the background.  
■ Do not use hard disk utilities, including those intended to enhance hard  
disk drive access speeds. They may cause unstable operation and  
damage data.  
■ Write from the computer's hard disk drive to the CD. Do not try to write  
from shared devices such as a LAN server or any other network device.  
■ Writing with software other than Sonic TOSHIBA Disc Creator has not  
been confirmed. Therefore, operation with other software cannot be  
guaranteed.  
When writing or rewriting  
Note the following when you write or rewrite a CD-R or CD-RW.  
■ Always copy data from the hard disk drive to the optical disc. Do not use  
cut-and-paste as the original data will be lost if there is a write error.  
■ Do not perform any of the following actions:  
■ Change users in the Windows XP operating system.  
■ Operate the computer for any other function, including use of a  
mouse or Touch Pad, closing/opening the LCD panel.  
■ Start a communication application such as a modem.  
■ Apply impact or vibration to the computer.  
■ Install, remove or connect external devices, including the following:  
PC card, SD/SDIO card, Memory Stick/Memory Stick Pro, xD  
picture card, MultiMediaCar, USB devices, external monitor, i.LINK  
devices, optical digital devices.  
■ Open the optical disc drive.  
■ Remove the optical disc from the Optical Disc Drive.  
■ Make sure writing or rewriting is completed before going into Standby or  
Hibernation Mode. When writing is completed, you can open the DVD-  
ROM&CD-R/RW drive tray.  
■ If the media is poor in quality, dirty or damaged, writing or rewriting  
errors may occur.  
■ Set the computer on a level surface and avoid places subject to  
vibration such as airplanes, trains or cars. Do not use an unstable  
surface such as a stand.  
■ Keep mobile phones and other wireless communication devices away  
from the computer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-17  
Operating Basics  
Writing CD/DVDs on DVD Super Multi drive  
You can use the DVD Super Multi drive to write data to either CD-R/RW or  
DVD-R/-R DL/-RW/+R/+R DL/+RW/-RAM discs. The TOSHIBA Disc  
Creator, the TOSHIBA Direct Disc Writer, the RecordNow! Basic for  
TOSHIBA and the DLA for TOSHIBA are provided for writing.  
■ Refer to the Writable discs, Chapter 2 for details about the types of  
writable CD/DVD discs.  
■ Do not turn off the power of the optical disc drive while the computer is  
accessing the drive. If you turn off the power, you may lose data.  
■ When the power of the optical disc drive is off, the disc tray will not  
open even if the eject button is pressed. Use the optical disc drive  
power icon to turn the power of the optical disc drive on. Refer to  
Chapter 1, Special features.  
When writing to media using an optical disc drive, always connect the AC  
adaptor to a power plug socket. If data is written while powered by the  
battery back, writing may sometimes fail due to low battery power and data  
loss may occur.  
Important message  
Before you write or rewrite to CD-R/RW or DVD-R/-R DL/-RW/+R/+R DL/  
+RW/-RAM discs, read and follow all setup and operating instructions in  
this section. If you fail to do so, the DVD Super Multi drive may not function  
properly, and you may fail to write or rewrite, lose data or incur other  
damage.  
Legal Footnotes  
TOSHIBA does not bear responsibility for the following:  
■ Damage to any CD-R/RW or DVD-R/-R DL/-RW/+R/+R DL/+RW/-RAM  
disc that may be caused by writing or rewriting with this product.  
■ Any change or loss of the recorded contents of CD-R/RW or DVD-R/-R  
DL/-RW/+R/+R DL/+RW/-RAM disc that may be caused by writing or  
rewriting with this product, or for any business profit loss or business  
interruption that may be caused by the change or loss of the recorded  
contents.  
■ Damage that may be caused by using third party equipment or  
software.  
Given the technological limitations of current optical disc writing drives, you  
may experience unexpected writing or rewriting errors due to disc quality or  
problems with hardware devices. Also, it is a good idea to make two or  
more copies of important data, in case of undesired change or loss of the  
recorded contents.  
4-18  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Basics  
Before writing or rewriting  
■ Based on TOSHIBA's limited compatibility testing, we suggest the  
following manufacturers of CD-R/RW and DVD-R/-R DL/+R/+R DL/-  
RW/+RW/-RAM disc. However, in no event does TOSHIBA guarantee  
the operation, quality or performance of any disc. Disc quality can affect  
write or rewrite success rates.  
CD-R:  
TAIYO YUDEN CO., LTD.  
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION  
RICOH Co., Ltd.  
CD-RW: (Multi-Speed and High-Speed)  
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION  
RICOH Co., Ltd.  
CD-RW: (Ultra-Speed)  
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION  
DVD-R:  
DVD Specifications for Recordable Disc for General Version 2.0  
TAIYO YUDEN CO., LTD.  
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.  
DVD+R:  
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION  
RICOH Co., Ltd.  
DVD+R DL:  
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION  
DVD-RW:  
DVD Specifications for Recordable Disc for Version 1.1 or version  
1.2  
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN.LIMITED  
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION  
DVD+RW:  
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION  
RICOH Co., Ltd.  
DVD-RAM:  
DVD Specifications for DVD-RAM Disc for Version 2.0, Version 2.1  
or Version 2.2  
Hitachi Maxell Ltd.  
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-19  
Operating Basics  
This drive cannot use discs that allow writing faster than 16 speed (DVD-R,  
DVD+R), 6 speed (DVD-RW), 4 speed (DVD+RW), 5 speed (DVD-RAM),  
4 speed (DVD-R DL, Double Layer supported model only), 8 speed  
(DVD+R DL, Double Layer supported model only).  
■ If the disc is poor in quality, dirty or damaged, writing or rewriting errors  
may occur. Be careful to check the disc for dirt or damage before you  
use it.  
■ The actual number of rewrites to CD-RW, DVD-RW, DVD+RW or DVD-  
RAM is affected by the quality of the disc and the way it is used.  
■ DISC created in DVD-R DL format4 (Layer Jump Recording) cannot be  
read.  
■ There are two types of DVD-R discs: authoring and general use discs.  
Do not use authoring discs. Only general use discs can be written to by  
a computer drive.  
■ You can use DVD-RAM discs that can be removed from a cartridge and  
DVD-RAM discs designed without a cartridge.  
■ Other DVD-ROM drives for computers or other DVD players may not be  
able to read DVD-R/-R DL/-RW or DVD+R/+R DL/+RW discs.  
■ Data written to a CD-R/DVD-R/-R DL/DVD+R/+R DL disc cannot be  
deleted either in whole or in part.  
■ Data deleted (erased) from a CD-RW, DVD-RW, DVD+RW and DVD-  
RAM disc cannot be recovered. Check the content of the disc carefully  
before you delete it. If multiple drives that can write data to discs are  
connected, be careful not to delete data from the wrong drive.  
■ In writing to a DVD-R/-R DL/-RW, DVD+R/+R DL/+RW or DVD-RAM  
disc, some disc space is required for file management, so you may not  
be able to write the full capacity of the disc.  
■ Since the disc is based on the DVD standard, it might be filled with  
dummy data if the written data is less than about 1 GB. Even if you write  
only a small amount of data, it might take time to fill in the dummy data.  
■ DVD-RAM formatted by FAT32 cannot be read in Windows 2000  
without DVD-RAM Driver Software.  
■ When multiple drives that can write data to discs are connected, be  
careful not to write to the wrong drive.  
■ Be sure to connect the AC adaptor before you write or rewrite.  
■ Before you enter stand by or Hibernation Mode, be sure to finish DVD-  
RAM writing. When writing is finished, you can eject DVD-RAM media.  
■ Be sure to close all other software programs except the writing  
software.  
■ Do not run software such as a screen saver, which can put a heavy load  
on the CPU.  
■ Operate the computer in the full-power mode. Do not use power-saving  
features. Be careful not to write to the wrong drive.  
4-20  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Basics  
■ Do not write while a virus check software is running. Wait for it to finish  
and then disable virus detection programs including any software that  
checks files automatically in the background.  
■ Do not use hard disk utilities, including those intended to enhance hard  
disk drive access speed. They may cause unstable operation and data  
damage.  
■ CD-RW (Ultra Speed +) media is not supported. If used, data may be  
lost or damaged.  
■ Write from the computer’s hard disk drive to the CD/DVD. Do not try to  
write from shared devices such as a LAN server or any other network  
device.  
■ Writing with software other than RecordNow! Basic for TOSHIBA,  
TOSHIBA Disc Creator and InterVideo WinDVD Creator Platinum is not  
recommended.  
When writing or rewriting  
Please observe/consider the following when you write or rewrite to a CD-R/  
RW, DVD-R/-R DL/-RW/-RAM or DVD+R/+R DL/+RW disc.  
■ Do not perform any of the following actions when writing or rewriting:  
■ Change users in the Windows XP operating system.  
■ Operate the computer for any other function, including using a  
mouse or Touch Pad or closing/opening the LCD panel.  
■ Start a communication application such as a modem.  
■ Apply impact or vibration to the computer.  
■ Install, remove or connect external devices, including the following:  
PC card, SD/SDIO card, Memory Stick/Memory Stick Pro, xD  
picture card, MultiMediaCard, USB devices, external monitor, i.LINK  
devices, optical digital devices.  
■ Use the Audio/Video control button to reproduce music or voice.  
■ Open the optical disc drive.  
■ Remove the optical disc from the Optical Disc Drive.  
■ Do not use shut down/log off and standby/hibernation while writing or  
rewriting.  
■ Make sure writing or rewriting is completed before going into standby/  
hibernation. Writing is completed if you can open the DVD-ROM&CD-R/  
RW or DVD Super Multi drive tray.  
■ Set the computer on a level surface and avoid places subject to  
vibration such as airplanes, trains, or cars. Do not use an unstable  
surface such as a stand.  
■ Keep mobile phones and other wireless communication devices away  
from the computer.  
■ Always copy data from the hard disk drive to the optical disc. Do not use  
cut-and-paste. The original data will be lost if there is a write error.  
Discs created in DVD-R DL format4 (Layer Jump Recording) cannot be  
read.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-21  
Operating Basics  
RecordNow! Basic for TOSHIBA  
This function is only in Windows XP Professional model.  
Note the following limitations when you use RecordNow!:  
■ DVD-Video cannot be created using RecordNow!.  
■ DVD-Audio cannot be created using RecordNow!.  
■ You cannot use RecordNow!’s “Audio CD for Car or Home CD Player”  
function to record music to the DVD-R/-R DL/-RW or  
DVD+R/+R DL/+RW discs.  
■ Do not use the “Exact Copy” function of RecordNow! to copy  
DVD-Video and DVD-ROM with copyright protection.  
■ DVD-RAM disc cannot be backed up with the “Exact Copy” function of  
RecordNow!.  
■ You cannot back up a CD-ROM or CD-R/RW to DVD-R/-R DL/-RW or  
DVD+R/+R DL/+RW using the “Exact Copy” function of RecordNow!.  
■ You cannot back up DVD-ROM, DVD-Video, DVD-R/-R DL/-RW or  
DVD+R/+R DL/+RW to CD-R/RW using the “Exact Copy” function of  
RecordNow!.  
■ RecordNow! cannot record in packet format.  
■ You might not be able to use the “Exact Copy” function of RecordNow!  
to back up a DVD-R/-R DL/-RW or DVD+R/+R DL/+RW disc that was  
made with other software on a different DVD-R/-R DL/-RW or  
DVD+R/+R DL/+RW recorder.  
■ If you add data to a DVD-R/-R DL and DVD+R/+R DL disc that you  
have already recorded to, you might not be able to read the added data  
under some circumstances. It cannot be read in 16-bit operating  
systems, such as Windows 98SE and Windows Me. In Windows NT4,  
you will need Service Pack 6 or later to read added data. In Windows  
2000, you will need Service Pack 2 or later to read it. Some DVD-ROM  
and DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drives cannot read added data regardless of  
the operating system.  
■ RecordNow! does not support recording to DVD-RAM discs. To record  
to a DVD-RAM, use Explorer or another utility.  
■ When you back up a DVD disc, be sure the source drive supports  
recording to DVD-R/-R DL/-RW or DVD+R/+R DL/+RW discs. If the  
source drive does not support recording to DVD-R/-R DL/-RW or  
DVD+R/+R DL/+RW discs, it might not be backed up correctly.  
■ When you back up a DVD-R/-R DL, DVD-RW, DVD+R/+R DL or  
DVD+RW, be sure to use the same type of disc.  
■ You cannot partially delete any data written to a CD-RW, DVD-RW or  
DVD+RW disc.  
4-22  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Basics  
TOSHIBA Disc Creator  
This function is only in Windows XP Home Edition model.  
Note the following limitations when you use TOSHIBA Disc Creator:  
■ DVD-Video cannot be created using TOSHIBA Disc Creator.  
■ DVD-Audio cannot be created using TOSHIBA Disc Creator.  
■ You cannot use TOSHIBA Disc Creator's “Audio” function to record  
music to the DVD-R/-R DL/-RW or DVD+R/+R DL/+RW discs.  
■ Do not use the “Disk Backup” function of TOSHIBA Disc Creator to  
copy DVD-Video and DVD-ROM with copyright protection.  
■ DVD-RAM disc cannot be backed up with the “Disk Backup” function of  
TOSHIBA Disc Creator.  
■ You cannot back up a CD-ROM or CD-R/RW to DVD-R/-R DL/-RW or  
DVD+R/+R DL/+RW using the “Disk Backup” function of TOSHIBA Disc  
Creator.  
■ You cannot back up DVD-ROM, DVD-Video, DVD-R/-R DL/-RW or  
DVD+R/+R DL/+RW to CD-R/RW using the “Disk Backup” function of  
TOSHIBA Disc Creator.  
■ TOSHIBA Disc Creator cannot record in packet format.  
■ You might not be able to use the “Disk Backup” function of TOSHIBA  
Disc Creator to back up a DVD-R/-R DL/-RW or DVD+R/+R DL/+RW  
disc that was made with other software on a different DVD-R/-R DL/-  
RW or DVD+R/+R DL/+RW recorder.  
■ If you add data to a DVD-R and DVD+R disc that you have already  
recorded to, you might not be able to read the added data under some  
circumstances. It cannot be read in 16-bit operating systems, such as  
Windows 98SE and Windows Me. In Windows NT4, you will need  
Service Pack 6 or later to read added data. In Windows 2000, you will  
need Service Pack 2 or later to read it. Some DVD-ROM and DVD-  
ROM&CD-R/RW drives cannot read added data regardless of the  
operating system.  
■ TOSHIBA Disc Creator does not support recording to DVD-RAM discs.  
To record to a DVD-RAM, use Explorer or another utility.  
■ When you back up a DVD disc, be sure the source drive supports  
recording to DVD-R/-R DL/-RW or DVD+R/+R DL/+RW discs. If the  
source drive does not support recording to DVD-R/-R DL/-RW or  
DVD+R/+R DL/+RW discs, it might not be backed up correctly.  
■ When you back up a DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R or DVD+RW, be sure  
to use the same type of disc.  
■ You cannot partially delete any data written to a CD-RW, DVD-RW or  
DVD+RW disc.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-23  
Operating Basics  
Data Verification  
To verify that data is written or rewritten correctly, follow the steps below  
before you write or rewrite a Data CD/DVD.  
1. Display the setting dialog box by one of the following two steps:  
2. Click the setting button (  
) for writing on the main toolbar in the  
Data CD/DVD mode.  
3. Select Setting for writing -> Data CD/DVD in the Setting menu.  
4. Mark the Verify written data check box.  
5. Select File Open or Full Compare mode.  
6. Click the OK button.  
DLA for TOSHIBA  
This function is only in Windows XP Professional model.  
Note the following limitations when you use DLA:  
■ This software supports only rewritable discs (DVD+RW, DVD-RW, and  
CD-RW). It does not support DVD+R/+R DL, DVD-R/-R DL, and CD-R  
discs that are not rewritable.  
■ DLA does not support formatting and writing to a DVD-RAM disc -  
these functions are performed by DVD-RAM Driver Software. Even if  
the DLA Format menu appears when inserting a DVD-RAM disc and  
right-clicking the drive icon in Windows Explorer, you should use the  
“DVDForm” command to format this disc. You can run “DVDForm” by  
clicking the Start button on the taskbar to display the Start menu and  
then selecting “All Programs”, “DVD-RAM”, “DVD-RAM Driver” and  
“DVDForm” sequentially.  
■ Do not use any discs that have been formatted with packet writing  
software other than DLA. Similarly, do not use any discs that have been  
formatted with DLA with any packet writing software other than DLA.  
When using a disc you are not familiar with, format it by selecting “Full  
Format” before using it.  
■ Do not use the cut-and-paste function for files and folders. A file or  
folder that has been cut may be lost if writing fails due to an error on the  
disc.  
■ When writing any setup files for an application to a disc formatted by  
DLA, and attempting to start Setup from this disc, an error may occur. In  
this case, please copy the files to your hard disk and then run Setup  
from there.  
4-24  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Basics  
TOSHIBA Direct Disc Writer  
This function is only in Windows XP Home Edition model.  
Note the following limitations when you use TOSHIBA Direct Disc Writer:  
■ This software supports only rewritable discs (DVD+RW, DVD-RW, and  
CD-RW). It does not support DVD+R/+R DL, DVD-R/-R DL, and CD-R  
discs that are not rewritable.  
■ TOSHIBA Direct Disc Writer does not support formatting and writing to  
a DVD-RAM disc - these functions are performed by DVD-RAM Driver  
Software. You can run “DVDForm” by clicking the Start button on the  
taskbar to display the Start menu and then selecting “All Programs”,  
“DVD-RAM”, “DVD-RAM Driver” and “DVDForm” sequentially.  
■ Do not use any discs that have been formatted with packet writing  
software other than TOSHIBA Direct Disc Writer. Similarly, do not use  
any discs that have been formatted with TOSHIBA Direct Disc Writer  
with any packet writing software other than TOSHIBA Direct Disc  
Writer. When using a disc you are not familiar with, format it by  
selecting “Full Format” before using it.  
■ Do not use the cut-and-paste function for files and folders. A file or  
folder that has been cut may be lost if writing fails due to an error on the  
disc.  
■ When writing any setup files for an application to a disc formatted by  
TOSHIBA Direct Disc Writer, and attempting to start Setup from this  
disc, an error may occur. In this case, please copy the files to your hard  
disk and then run Setup from there.  
When using WinDVD Creator Platinum  
You can record video back to your digital camcorder via i.LINK (IEEE1394)  
using WinDVD Creator Platinum. However, there is a case where its  
playback sound appears choppy - in this instance please follow the  
instructions below:  
1. Click start and select the Control Panel.  
2. Click the Performance and Maintenance icon in the Control Panel.  
3. Click the System icon in the Performance and Maintenance window.  
4. Click the Advanced tab in the System Properties window.  
5. Click the Settings icon in the “Performance” section.  
6. Click the Advanced tab in the Performance Options window.  
7. Click the Change icon in the “virtual memory” section.  
8. Select the Custom size button in the Virtual Memory window.  
9. Specify much higher values for “Initial size” and “Maximum size.”  
10. Click the Set button in the Virtual Memory window.  
11. Click the OK button in the Virtual Memory window.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-25  
Operating Basics  
How to make a DVD-Video  
Simplified steps for making a DVD-Video from video data captured from a  
DV-Camcorder:  
1. Click Start -> All Programs -> InterVideo WinDVD Creator2 ->  
InterVideo WinDVD Creator to launch WinDVD Creator.  
2. Click Capture button then capture the video data from the DV->  
Camcorder via IEEE1394.  
3. Click Edit button then drag the video clips from Video Library tab to  
the edit track.  
4. Click Make Movie button in the top bar.  
5. Double Click the Right arrow button icon in the center of right side.  
6. Put a blank DVD-R/+R disc or an erased DVD-RW/+RW disc in the  
drive.  
7. Click Start to record to the disc.  
8. When recording is finished, the tray opens.  
How to learn more about InterVideo WinDVD Creator  
Please refer to the on-line Help for additional InterVideo WinDVD Creator  
information.  
Important information for use  
Note the following limitations when you write to a video DVD:  
1. Editing digital video  
■ Log in with Administrator rights to use WinDVD Creator.  
■ Make sure that your computer is running on AC power when using  
WinDVD Creator.  
■ Operate the computer at Full Power. Do not use power-saving  
features.  
■ While you are editing a DVD-Video, you can display previews.  
However, if another application is running, the preview might not  
display properly.  
■ WinDVD Creator cannot show video on the external monitor when in  
simultaneous mode.  
■ WinDVD Creator cannot edit or play copy protected content.  
■ Do not change display settings while using WinDVD Creator.  
■ Do not enter standby/Hibernation Mode while using WinDVD  
Creator.  
■ Do not operate WinDVD Creator immediately after turning on the  
computer. Please wait until all disk/disc drive activity has stopped.  
■ When recording to a DV-Camcorder, to ensure you capture all of  
your data, let the camcorder record for a few seconds before you  
begin recording your actual data.  
■ CD recorder, JPEG functions, DVD-Audio, mini DVD and Video CD  
functions are not supported in this version.  
4-26  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Basics  
■ While recording video to DVD or tape, please close all other  
programs.  
■ Do not run software like a screen saver because it can put a heavy  
load on the CPU.  
■ Do not run communication applications like a modem or a LAN.  
2. Before recording the video to DVD  
■ When you record to DVD discs, please use only media  
recommended by TOSHIBA.  
■ Do not set the working drive to a slow device like a USB 1.1 hard  
disk drive or it will fail to write the DVD.  
■ Do not perform any of the following actions:  
■ Operate the computer for any other function, including using a  
mouse or Touch Pad or closing/opening the LCD panel.  
■ Bump or cause vibration to the computer.  
■ Use the Mode control button and Audio/Video control button to  
reproduce music or voice.  
■ Open the optical disc drive.  
■ Install, remove or connect external devices, including the  
following:  
PC card, SD/SDIO card, Memory Stick/Memory Stick Pro, xD  
picture card, MultiMediaCard, USB devices, external monitor,  
i.LINK devices, optical digital devices.  
■ Please verify your disc after recording important data.  
■ DVD-R/+R/-RW discs cannot be written in VR format.  
■ WinDVD Creator cannot export to DVD-Audio, VideoCD or miniDVD  
format.  
■ WinDVD Creator can write DVD-RAM/+RW in VR format, but the  
disc may only play on your computer.  
■ When writing to a DVD disc, WinDVD Creator requires 2GB or more  
of disk space for every one hour of video.  
■ When you make a fully recorded DVD, the chapter sequence may  
not play correctly.  
3. About Disc Manager  
■ WinDVD Creator can edit one play list on a disc.  
■ WinDVD Creator might show a different thumbnail than you  
previously set in CE (Consumer Electronics) DVD-RAM recorder.  
■ Using the Disc Manager, you can edit DVD-VR format on DVD-  
RAM, DVD+VR format on DVD+RW, and DVD-Video format on  
DVD-RW.  
4. About recorded DVDs  
■ Some DVD-ROM drives for personal computers or other DVD  
players may not be able to read DVD-R/+R/-R DL/+R DL/-RW/+RW/  
-RAM discs.  
■ When playing your recorded disc on your computer, please use the  
WinDVD software application.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-27  
Operating Basics  
■ If you use an over-used rewritable disc, the full formatting might be  
locked. Please use a brand new disc.  
Media care  
This section provides tips on protecting data stored on your CD/DVDs and  
floppy disks.  
Handle your media with care. The following simple precautions will  
increase the lifetime of your media and protect the data stored on them:  
CD/DVDs  
1. Store your CD/DVDs in the container they came in to protect them and  
keep them clean.  
2. Do not bend the CD/DVD.  
3. Do not write on, apply a sticker to, or otherwise mar the surface of the  
CD/DVD that contains data.  
4. Hold the CD/DVD by its outside edge or the edge on the center hole.  
Fingerprints on the surface can prevent the drive from properly reading  
data.  
5. Do not expose to direct sunlight, extreme heat or cold. Do not place  
heavy objects on your CD/DVDs.  
6. If your CD/DVDs become dusty or dirty, wipe them with a clean dry  
cloth. Wipe from the center out, do not wipe in a circular direction  
around the CD/DVD. If necessary, use a cloth dampened in water or a  
neutral cleaner. Do not use benzine, thinner or similar cleaner.  
Floppy disks  
1. Store your floppy disks in the container they came in to protect them  
and keep them clean. If a floppy disk is dirty, do not use cleaning fluid.  
Clean it with a soft damp cloth.  
2. Never open the shutter or touch the magnetic surface of your floppy  
disk. You could permanently damage it and lose data.  
3. Always handle floppy disks with care, to prevent the loss of stored data.  
Always apply the floppy disk label in the correct location. Never apply a  
new label on top of an existing one. The label could come loose and  
damage the floppy drive.  
4. Never use a pencil for writing on a floppy disk label. Pencil lead dust  
could cause a system malfunction. Always use a felt-tipped pen. When  
writing a title on a label, first write on the label, then apply the label to  
the floppy disk.  
5. Never put a floppy disk in a location where water or other liquid may  
contact it or where it is excessively damp. It could cause data loss.  
Never use a wet or damp floppy disk. It could damage the floppy disk  
drive or other devices.  
6. Data may be lost if the floppy disk is twisted, bent, or exposed to direct  
sunlight, extreme heat or cold.  
4-28  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Basics  
7. Do not place heavy objects on your floppy disks.  
8. Do not eat, smoke, or use erasers near your floppy disks. Foreign  
particles inside the floppy disk’s jacket can damage the magnetic  
surface.  
9. Magnetic energy can destroy the data on your floppy disks. Keep your  
floppy disks away from speakers, radios, television sets and other  
sources of magnetic fields.  
Sound system  
This section describes audio controls including sound levels and power  
management.  
Volume Control  
The Volume Control utility lets you control the audio volume in Windows for  
both playback and recording.  
■ To launch Volume Control for playback, click start, point to All  
Programs, point to Accessories, point to Entertainment and click  
Volume Control.  
■ To launch Recording Control, click Options, point to Properties,  
choose Recording and click OK.  
■ To view details of the Volume Control, click Help on the Volume  
Control.  
Microphone level  
The change the microphone gain, follow the steps below.  
1. Click start, point to All Programs, point to Accessories, point to  
Entertainment and click Volume Control.  
2. Click Options and point to Properties.  
3. Select Recording and click OK.  
4. Click Options and select Advanced Controls.  
5. Click Advanced.  
6. Check the Microphone Boost checkbox.  
SoundMAX control panel  
The SoundMAX control panel lets you control additional functions for the  
Microphone Enhancement and Audio Power Management. To launch the  
SoundMAX Control Panel, follow the steps below.  
1. Click start and click Control Panel.  
2. If you are viewing the Control Panel in Category View, click on Switch  
to Classic View.  
3. Double-click the SoundMAX icon.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-29  
Operating Basics  
The Microphone Setup allows you to optimize the microphone input  
settings for your particular configuration. Choose Standard Microphone if  
you have an ordinary desktop microphone. Choose Headset if you have a  
wearable microphone that is positioned directly in front of your mouth.  
You can launch the Setup Wizard from the Control Panel to help you to  
automatically set proper microphone input volumes and ensure that your  
voice input(s) are working correctly. As you speak into the microphone, the  
Sound Meter indicates the audio signal that your computer is receiving.  
The Noise Reduction enhancement helps to eliminate ambient noise from  
the voice input signal to provide a clean and clear signal to applications.  
This feature can be used with any microphone.  
The audio controller can be powered down when the audio function is idle.  
To enable the Audio Power Management, follow the steps below.  
1. Click the Power Management tab.  
2. Select the Normal Power Savings in the Power Mode pull-down list.  
If the No Power Savings is selected, the audio controller always runs.  
Modem  
This section describes how to connect and disconnect the internal modem  
to and from a telephone jack.  
■ Connection to any communication line other than an analog phone line  
could cause a PC system failure.  
■ Connect the built-in modem only to ordinary analog phone lines.  
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a digital line (ISDN).  
■ Never connect the built-in modem to the digital connector on a  
public telephone or to a digital private branch exchange (PBX).  
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a key telephone system for  
residences or offices.  
■ Never operate your PC on AC power during a thunderstorm. If you see  
lightning or hear thunder, immediately turn off the PC. An electric surge  
caused by the storm, may result in a system failure, loss of data or  
hardware damage.  
Region selection  
Telecommunication regulations vary from one region to another, so you will  
need to make sure the internal modem’s settings are correct for the region  
in which it will be used.  
The built-in modem can be used only in specified countries and regions.  
Using the modem in an area not specified for use may cause a system  
failure. Check the specified areas carefully before using it.  
4-30  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Basics  
To select a region, follow the steps below.  
1. Click start, point to All Programs, point to TOSHIBA, point to  
Networking and click Modem Region Select.  
Do not use the Country/Region Select function in the Modem setup utility  
in the Control Panel if the function is available. If you change the Country/  
Region in the Control Panel, the change may not take effect.  
2. The Region Selection icon will appear in the Windows Task Bar.  
3. Click the icon with the primary mouse button to display a list of regions  
that the modem supports. A sub menu for telephony location  
information will also be displayed. A check will appear next to the  
currently selected region and telephony location.  
4. Select a region from the region menu or a telephony location from the  
sub-menu.  
■ When you click a region it becomes the modem’s region selection,  
and the New Location for telephony will be set automatically.  
■ When you select a telephony location, the corresponding region is  
automatically selected and it becomes the modem’s current region  
setting.  
Properties menu  
Click the icon with the secondary mouse button to display properties menu  
on the screen.  
Setting  
You can enable or disable the following settings:  
AutoRun Mode  
The Region Select utility starts automatically when you start up the  
operating system.  
Open the Dialing Properties dialog box after selecting region.  
The dialing properties dialog box will be displayed automatically after you  
select the region.  
Location list for region selection.  
A submenu appears displaying location information for telephony.  
Open dialog box, if the modem and Telephony Current  
Location region code do not match.  
A warning dialog box is displayed if current settings for region code and  
telephony location are incorrect.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-31  
Operating Basics  
Modem Selection  
If the computer cannot recognize the internal modem, a dialog box is  
displayed. Select the COM port for your modem to use.  
Dialing Properties  
Select this item to display the dialing properties.  
If you are using the computer in Japan, the Telecommunications Business  
Law requires that you select Japan region mode. It is illegal to use the  
modem in Japan with any other selection.  
Connecting  
To connect the modular cable, follow the steps below.  
The modular cable that comes with the computer must be used to connect  
the modem. Connect the end of the modular cable with the core to the  
computer.  
■ Connection to any communication line other than an analog phone line  
could cause a PC system failure.  
■ Connect the built-in modem only to ordinary analog phone lines.  
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a digital line (ISDN).  
■ Never connect the built-in modem to the digital connector on a  
public telephone or to a digital private branch exchange (PBX).  
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a key telephone system for  
residences or offices.  
■ Never operate your PC on AC power during a thunderstorm. If you see  
lightning or hear thunder, immediately turn off the PC. An electric surge  
caused by the storm, may result in a system failure, loss of data or  
hardware damage.  
1. Plug one end of the modular cable into the computer’s modem jack.  
4-32  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Basics  
2. Plug the other end of the modular cable into a telephone jack.  
Telephone jack  
Modular cable  
Modem jack  
Figure 4-11 Connecting the internal modem  
Do not pull on the cable or move the computer while the cable is  
connected.  
If you use a storage device such as an optical disc drive or hard disk drive  
connected to a 16-bit PC card, you might experience the following modem  
problems:  
■ Modem speed is slow or communication is interrupted.  
■ Skips may occur in sound.  
Disconnecting  
To disconnect the internal modular cable, follow the steps below.  
1. Pinch the lever on the connector in the telephone jack and pull out the  
connector.  
2. Disconnect the cable from the computer’s modem jack in the same  
manner.  
Wireless communications  
The computer’s wireless communication function supports both Wireless  
LAN and Bluetooth devices.  
All models are provided with Wireless Communication switch. Some  
models are equipped with both Wireless LAN and Bluetooth functions.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-33  
Operating Basics  
Wireless LAN  
The Wireless LAN is compatible with other LAN systems based on Direct  
Sequence Spread Spectrum /Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing  
radio technology that complies with IEEE802.11 Wireless LAN standard  
(Revision A, B or G).  
■ Theoretical maximum speed: 54Mbps (IEEE802.11a, 802.11g)  
■ Theoretical maximum speed: 11Mbps (IEEE802.11b)  
■ Frequency Channel Selection (Revision A: 5 GHz, Revision B/G: 2.4  
GHz)  
■ Roaming over multiple channels  
■ Card Power Management  
■ Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) data encryption, based on 152 bit  
encryption algorithm (Atheros module type).  
■ Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) data encryption, based on 128 bit  
encryption algorithm (Intel module type).  
■ Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA).  
■ Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) data encryption.  
■ The values shown above are the theoretical maximums for Wireless  
LAN standards. The actual values may differ.  
■ The transmission speed over the wireless LAN, and the distance over  
which the wireless LAN can reach, may vary depending on surrounding  
electromagnetic environment, obstacles, access point design and  
configuration, client design and software/hardware configurations. The  
transmission rate described is the theoretical maximum speed as  
specified under the appropriate standard - the actual transmission  
speed will be lower than the theoretical maximum speed.  
Security  
■ TOSHIBA strongly recommend that you enable WEP (encryption)  
functionality, otherwise your computer will be open to illegal access by  
an outsider using a wireless connection. If this occurs, the outsider may  
illegally access your system, eavesdrop, or cause the loss or  
destruction of stored data.  
■ TOSHIBA is not liable for the loss of data due to eavesdropping or  
illegal access through the wireless LAN and the damage thereof.  
Bluetooth wireless technology  
Some models in this series are equipped with Bluetooth™ wireless  
technology that eliminates the need for cables between electronic devices  
such as desktop computers, printers and mobile phones.  
You cannot use the built-in Bluetooth functions and an optional Bluetooth  
SD card 3 simultaneously.  
Bluetooth wireless technology has the following features:  
4-34  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Basics  
Worldwide operation  
The Bluetooth radio transmitter and receiver operate in the 2.4 GHz band,  
which is license-free and compatible with radio systems in most countries  
in the world.  
Radio links  
You can easily establish links between two or more devices. The link is  
maintained even if the devices are not within line of sight.  
Security  
Two advanced security mechanisms ensure a high level of security:  
■ Authentication prevents access to critical data and makes it impossible  
to falsify the origin of a message.  
■ Encryption prevents eavesdropping and maintains link privacy.  
®
TM  
Bluetooth Stack for Windows by TOSHIBA  
Please note that this software is specifically designed for the following  
operating systems:  
■ Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional  
■ Microsoft® Windows® XP  
Detailed information regarding the use with these operating systems is  
listed below. Please refer also to the electronic information which is  
included with each software.  
This BluetoothTM Stack is based on BluetoothTM Version 1.1/1.2/2.0+EDR  
specification. TOSHIBA cannot confirm compatibility between any PC  
products and/or other electronic devices that use BluetoothTM other than  
TOSHIBA mobile PCs.  
Release Notes related to the BluetoothTM Stack for  
Windows® by TOSHIBA  
1. Install:  
®
On Windows2000 or Windows XP, BluetoothTM Stack for Windows by  
TOSHIBA does not have a digital signature.  
2. Fax application software:  
Regarding FAX application software, there are some software that you  
cannot use on this BluetoothTM Stack.  
3. Multi User:  
On Windows XP, the use of Bluetooth is not supported in a multi-user  
environment. This means that, when you use Bluetooth, other users  
logged onto the same computer will not be able to use its Bluetooth  
functionality.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-35  
Operating Basics  
Product Support:  
The latest information regarding Operating System support, Language  
Support or available upgrades can be found on our web site http://  
www.toshiba-europe.com/computers/tnt/bluetooth.htm in Europe or  
www.pcsupport.toshiba.com in the United States.  
Wireless communication switch  
You can enable or disable Wireless LAN and Bluetooth functions, with the  
on/off switch. No transmissions are sent or received when the switch is off.  
Slide the switch to the right to turn it on and to the left to turn it off.  
■ Do not use the WiFi or Bluetooth functionalities near a microwave oven  
or in areas subject to radio interference or magnetic fields. Interference  
from a microwave oven or other source can disrupt WiFi or Bluetooth  
operation.  
■ Turn WiFi and Bluetooth functionalities off when near a person who  
may have a cardiac pacemaker implant or other medical electric  
device. Radio waves may affect pacemaker or medical device  
operation, possibly resulting in serious injury. Follow the instruction of  
your medical device when using any WiFi or Bluetooth functionality.  
■ Always turn off WiFi or Bluetooth functionality if the PC is near  
automatic control equipment or appliances such as automatic doors or  
fire detectors. Radio waves can cause malfunction of such equipment,  
possibly resulting in serious injury.  
Wireless communication Indicator  
The wireless communication indicator indicates the status of the wireless  
communication functions.  
Indicator status  
Indication  
Indicator off  
Wireless communication switch is set to off.  
Automatic power down because of overheating.  
Power malfunction.  
Indicator glows  
Wireless communication switch is on. Wireless  
LAN or Bluetooth is turned on by an application.  
If you used the Task Bar to disable the wireless LAN, restart the computer  
or perform the following procedure to re-enable it: start, Control Panel,  
System, Hardware, Device Manager, Network adapters, Intel® PRO/  
Wireless 3945BG/3945ABG Network Connection or Atheros  
AR5006EG/AR5006EX Wireless Network Adapter and enable.  
4-36  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Basics  
LAN  
The computer has built-in support for Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per  
second, 10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second,  
100BASE-TX) and Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per second,  
1000BASE-T).  
Some models are equipped with a Gigabit Ethernet LAN.  
This section describes how to connect/disconnect to a LAN.  
Do not install or remove an optional memory module while Wake-up on  
LAN is enabled.  
■ The Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even when the system  
is off. Leave the AC adaptor connected while using this feature.  
■ The Link speed (10/100/1000 megabits per second) changes  
automatically depending on the network conditions (connected device,  
cable or noise and so on).  
LAN cable types  
The computer must be configured properly before connecting to a LAN.  
Logging onto a LAN using the computer’s default settings could cause a  
malfunction in LAN operation. Check with your LAN administrator  
regarding set-up procedures.  
If you are using Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per second,  
1000BASE-T), be sure to connect with a CAT5E cable or higher. You  
cannot use a CAT3 or CAT5 cable.  
If you are using Fast Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second, 100BASE-  
TX), be sure to connect with a CAT5 cable or higher. You cannot use a  
CAT3 cable.  
If you are using Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per second, 10BASE-T), you  
can connect with a CAT3 or higher.  
Connecting LAN cable  
To connect a LAN cable, follow the steps below.  
■ Connect the AC adaptor before connecting a LAN cable. The AC  
adaptor must remain connected during LAN use. If you disconnect the  
AC Adaptor while the computer is accessing a LAN, the system may  
hang up.  
■ Do not connect any other cable to the LAN jack except the LAN cable.  
Otherwise, malfunctions or damage may occur.  
■ Do not connect any power supplying device to the LAN cable that is  
connected to the LAN jack. Otherwise, malfunctions or damage may  
occur.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-37  
Operating Basics  
1. Turn off the power to the computer and to all external devices  
connected to the computer.  
2. Plug one end of the cable into the LAN jack. Press gently until you hear  
the latch click into place.  
LAN connector  
LAN jack  
Figure 4-12 Connecting a LAN cable  
3. Plug the other end of the cable into a LAN hub connector. Check with  
your LAN administrator before connecting to a hub.  
When the computer is exchanging data with the LAN, the LAN Active  
indicator glows orange. When the computer is connected to a LAN hub but  
is not exchanging data, the Link indicator glows green.  
Disconnecting LAN cable  
To disconnect a LAN cable, follow the steps below.  
Make sure the LAN Active indicator (orange LED) is out before you  
disconnect the computer from the LAN.  
1. Pinch the lever on the connector in the computer’s LAN jack and pull  
out the connector.  
2. Disconnect the cable from the LAN hub in the same manner. Check  
with your LAN administrator before disconnecting from the hub.  
Cleaning the computer  
To help ensure long, trouble-free operation, keep the computer free of dust  
and use care with liquids around the computer.  
■ Be careful not to spill liquids into the computer. If the computer does get  
wet, turn the power off immediately and let the computer dry completely  
before you turn it on again.  
■ Clean the computer using a slightly damp (with water) cloth. You can  
use glass cleaner on the LCD display screen. Spray a small amount of  
cleaner on a soft, clean cloth and wipe the screen gently with the cloth.  
Never spray cleaner directly onto the computer or let liquid run into any  
part of it. Never use harsh or caustic chemical products to clean the  
computer.  
4-38  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Basics  
Moving the computer  
The computer is designed for rugged durability. However, a few simple  
precautions taken when moving the computer will help ensure trouble-free  
operation.  
■ Before moving the computer, it recommends changing the function of  
HDD Protection. Refer to the section, Using the Hard Disk Drive (HDD)  
Protection, in this chapter.  
■ Make sure all disk activity has ended before moving the computer.  
Check the HDD indicator on the computer.  
■ If a CD/DVD is in the drives, remove it. Also make sure the disc tray is  
securely closed.  
■ Turn off the power to the computer.  
■ Disconnect the AC adaptor and all peripherals before moving the  
computer.  
■ Close the LCD display panel. Do not pick up the computer by its display  
panel.  
■ Before carrying your computer, shut down the computer, disconnect the  
power cable and wait until the PC cools down. Failure to follow this  
instruction could result in minor injury.  
■ Always turn off the power when you move the computer. If the power  
button has a lock, set it to the lock position. Also be careful not to  
subject the computer to impact. Failure to follow this instruction could  
result in damage to computer, computer failure or loss of data.  
■ Never transport your computer with PC cards installed. This could  
cause damage to your computer and/or PC card, resulting in product  
failure.  
■ Use the carrying case when transporting the computer.  
■ When carrying your computer, be sure to hold it securely so that it does  
not fall or hit anything.  
■ Do not carry your computer by holding protruded portions.  
Using the Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Protection  
This computer has a function for reducing the risk of damage on hard disk  
drive.  
Using the acceleration sensor built in the computer, the HDD Protection  
function detects vibration, shocks and other such occurrences in the  
computer, and automatically moves the HDD (Hard Disk Drive) head to the  
safe position to reduce the risk of damage that could be caused to the disk  
by head-to-disk contact.  
This function does not guarantee that the hard disk drive will not be  
damaged.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-39  
Operating Basics  
When vibration is detected, the following message is displayed, and the  
icon in the notification area of the taskbar is changed to the protection  
state. This message is displayed until the OK button is pressed or 30  
seconds pass. When vibration subsides, the icon returns to the normal  
state.  
Figure 4-13 HDD Protection Message  
Taskbar Icon  
State  
Icon Description  
HDD Protection is enabled.  
Normal  
Protection  
OFF  
HDD Protection is active. The hard disk drive  
head is in a safe position.  
HDD Protection is disabled.  
4-40  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Basics  
TOSHIBA HDD Protection Properties  
You can make the HDD Protection settings by using the TOSHIBA HDD  
Protection Properties window. To open the window, click start, point to All  
Programs, point to TOSHIBA, point to Utilities and click HDD Protection  
setting. The window can also be started from the icon on the Taskbar, or  
from the Control Panel.  
Figure 4-14 TOSHIBA HDD Protection Properties  
HDD Protection  
You can choose whether to enable or disable HDD Protection.  
Detection Level  
This function can be set to four levels. The sensitivity levels in which  
vibrations, impacts and similar occurrences are detected can be set to  
OFF, 1, 2 and 3 in ascending order. Level 3 is recommended for better  
protection of the computer. However, when the computer is used as  
handheld or in other unstable conditions, setting the detection level to 3  
could result in frequent execution of HDD Protection, which will slow HDD  
reading and writing. Set a lower detection level when the speed of HDD  
reading and writing is a priority.  
Different detection levels can be set depending on whether the computer is  
used as handheld or mobile usages, or whether it is used in a stable  
environment such as on a table in the workplace or at home. By setting  
different detection levels for the computer depending on whether it runs  
with the AC power (desktop) or with batteries (handheld or mobile usage),  
the detection level automatically switches according to the power  
connection mode.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-41  
Operating Basics  
Details  
To open the Details window, click the Setup Detail button in the TOSHIBA  
HDD Protection Properties window.  
Figure 4-15 Details  
Detection Level Amplification  
When the AC adaptor is disconnected or the lid is closed, HDD Detection  
assumes that the computer will be carried and sets the detection level to  
the maximum for 10 seconds.  
HDD Protection Message  
Specify whether to display a message when HDD Protection is active.  
■ This function does not work when the computer is starting, in Standby,  
in Hibernation, in transition to Hibernation, recovering from Hibernation,  
or powered off. Be sure to not subject the computer to vibration or  
impact while the function is disabled.  
■ This function is only supported under Windows® XP.  
Heat dispersal  
To protect from overheating, the CPU has an internal temperature sensor.  
If the computer’s internal temperature rises to a certain level, the cooling  
fan is turned on or the processing speed is lowered. You can select  
whether to control the CPU temperature by turning on the fan first, then if  
necessary, lowering the CPU speed. Or, by lowering the CPU speed first,  
then if necessary, turning on the fan. Use the Cooling Method item of the  
Basic Setup tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver.  
When the CPU temperature falls to a normal range, the fan is turned off  
and the CPU operation returns to standard speed.  
If the CPU temperature reaches an unacceptably high level with either  
setting, the system automatically shuts down to prevent damage. Data in  
memory will be lost.  
4-42  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Satellite U200/PORTÉGÉ M500  
Chapter 5  
The Keyboard  
The computer’s keyboard layouts are compatible with a 101/102-key  
enhanced keyboard. By pressing some keys in combination, all the 101/  
102-key keyboard functions can be executed on the computer.  
The number of keys on your keyboard depends on which country/region’s  
keyboard layout your computer is configured with. Keyboards for numerous  
languages are available.  
There are six types of keys: typewriter keys, function keys, soft keys, Hot  
keys, Windows special keys and keypad overlay.  
Typewriter keys  
The typewriter keys produce the upper- and lower-case letters, numbers,  
punctuation marks, and special symbols that appear on the screen.  
There are some differences, however, between using a typewriter and  
using a computer keyboard:  
■ Letters and numbers produced in computer text vary in width. Spaces,  
which are created by a “space character,” may also vary depending on  
line justification and other factors.  
■ The lowercase l (el) and the number 1 (one) are not interchangeable on  
computers as they are on a typewriter.  
■ The uppercase O (oh) and the 0 (zero) are not interchangeable.  
■ The Caps Lock function key locks only the alphabetic characters in  
uppercase while the shift lock on a typewriter places all keys in the  
shifted position.  
■ The Shift keys, the Tab key, and the BkSp (backspace) key perform  
the same function as their typewriter counterparts but also have special  
computer functions.  
Never remove the key caps as it will cause damage to the parts under the  
key caps.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-1  
The Keyboard  
Function keys: F1 … F12  
The function keys (not to be confused with Fn) are the 12 keys at the top of  
your keyboard. These keys function differently from other keys.  
F1 through F12 are called function keys because they execute  
programmed functions when pressed. Used in combination with the Fn  
key, keys marked with icons execute specific functions on the computer.  
Refer to the section, Soft keys: Fn key combinations, in this chapter. The  
function executed by individual keys depends on the software you are  
using.  
Soft keys: Fn key combinations  
The Fn (function) is unique to TOSHIBA computers and is used in  
combination with other keys to form soft keys. Soft keys are key  
combinations that enable, disable or configure specific features.  
Some software may disable or interfere with soft-key operations. Soft-key  
settings are not restored by the Standby feature.  
Emulating keys on enhanced keyboard  
PrtSc  
Scroll  
lock  
Pause  
Break  
Esc  
F1  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F7  
F8  
F9  
F10  
F11  
F12  
F2  
SysReq  
_
~
`
!
@
#
$
%
&
7
(
)
+
=
Num  
Lock  
*
^
PgUp  
PgDn  
*
.
Bk Sp  
Ins  
Home  
End  
/
2
6
8
-
1
3
4
5
9
0
7
8
9
{
[
}
]
Tab  
Del  
Q
W
E
R
T
Y
U
I
O
P
\
Home  
PgUp  
6
+
, ,  
,
:
;
4
5
2
Enter  
CapsLock  
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
<
,
3
>
?
/
1
Shift  
Z
X
C
V
B
N
M
Shift  
.
PgDn  
End  
Enter  
.
0
Ctrl  
Alt  
Alt  
Ctrl  
Del  
Ins  
Figure 5-1 A 101-key enhanced keyboard layout  
The keyboard is designed to provide all the features of the 101-key  
enhanced keyboard. The 101/102-key enhanced keyboard has a numeric  
keypad and scroll lock key. It also has additional Enter and Ctrl keys to the  
right of the main keyboard. Since the keyboard is smaller and has fewer  
keys, some of the enhanced keyboard functions must be simulated using  
two keys instead of one on the larger keyboard.  
Your software may require you to use keys that the keyboard does not  
have. Pressing the Fn key and one of the following keys simulates the  
enhanced keyboard’s functions.  
5-2  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Keyboard  
Press Fn + F10 or Fn + F11 to access the integrated keypad. When  
activated, the keys with gray markings on the bottom edge become  
numeric keypad keys (Fn + F11) or cursor control keys (Fn + F10). Refer to  
the Keypad overlay section in this chapter for more information on how to  
operate these keys. The power on default for both settings is off.  
Press Fn + F12 (ScrLock) to lock the cursor on a specific line. The power  
on default is off.  
Press Fn + Enter to simulate Enter on the enhanced keyboard’s numeric  
keypad.  
Press Fn + Ctrl to simulate the enhanced keyboard’s right Ctrl key.  
Hot keys  
Hot keys (Fn + a function or Esc key) let you enable or disable certain  
features of the computer.  
Sound mute: Pressing Fn + Esc in a Windows environment turns sound  
on or off. When you press these hot keys, the current setting will change  
and be displayed as an icon. Pressing the Volume control dial turns Mute  
off. Refer to the Right side section in Chapter 2 for details.  
User’s Manual  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Keyboard  
Instant security: Press Fn + F1 to blank the screen to prevent others from  
accessing your data. To restore the screen and original settings, press any  
key or press the Touch Pad. If a screensaver password is registered, a  
dialog box will appear. Enter the screensaver password and click OK. If no  
password is set, the screen will be restored when you press any key or  
press the Touch Pad.  
Power save mode: Pressing Fn + F2 changes the power save mode.  
If you press Fn + F2 in a Windows environment, the settings dialog box for  
the Power Save Mode will be displayed. Continue holding down Fn, and  
release and press F2 again to toggle between the settings. Release both  
Fn and F2 to put the new setting into effect. You can also change this  
setting through the Profile options in TOSHIBA Power Saver.  
Standby: When you press Fn + F3, the computer enters the Standby  
Mode. Before entering Standby, a dialog box appears asking for your  
confirmation. This dialog box will not be displayed in the future when you  
click the check box.  
Hibernation: When you press Fn + F4, the computer enters the  
Hibernation Mode. Before entering Hibernation, a dialog box appears  
asking for your confirmation. This dialog box will not be displayed in the  
future when you click the check box.  
5-4  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Keyboard  
Display selection: Press Fn + F5 to change the active display device.  
When you press these hot keys, a dialog box appears. Only selectable  
devices will be displayed. Hold down Fn and press F5 again to change the  
device. When you release Fn and F5, the selected device will change. If  
you hold down these hot keys for five seconds the selection will return to  
the internal LCD.  
Internal LCD screen Brightness: Pressing Fn + F6 decreases the LCD  
screen brightness in decrements. When you press these hot keys, the  
current setting will be displayed for two seconds by an icon. You can also  
change this setting through the Screen brightness item of the Basic Setup  
tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver.  
Internal LCD screen Brightness: Pressing Fn + F7 increases the LCD  
screen brightness in increments. When you press these hot keys, the  
current setting will be displayed for two seconds by a pop-up icon. You can  
also change this setting through the Screen brightness item of the Basic  
Setup tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver.  
■ The brightness level is always set at the maximum value for about 18  
seconds, when the internal LCD screen turns on.  
■ LCD screen clarity increases with the brightness level.  
Wireless setting: If your computer has both Bluetooth and Wireless LAN  
functions, you can press Fn + F8 to select which type of wireless  
communication you want to use. When you press these hot keys, a dialog  
box will appear. Continue holding down Fn and press F8 to change the  
setting. If wireless communication is turned off, Disabled Wireless  
Communication Switchwill be displayed.  
If no wireless communication device is installed, no dialog box will appear.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-5  
The Keyboard  
Touch Pad: Pressing Fn + F9 in a windows environment enables or  
disables the Touch Pad function. When you press these hot keys, the  
current setting will change and be displayed as an icon.  
LCD screen resolution selection: Press Fn + Space keys to change the  
display resolution. Each time when you press these hot keys, the LCD  
screen resolution changes as follows: The available resolution depends on  
the model. With WXGA+, you can change the resolution between 800 ×  
600 and 1024 × 768 pixels.  
Optical disc drive power: Press the Fn + Tab keys to turn the power of  
the optical disc drive on or eject the disc tray. A dialog box is displayed  
when this hotkey is pressed. To choose between the functions, press the  
Tab key while holding down the Fn key. The chosen function is executed  
when the Fn + Tab keys are released.  
TOSHIBA Zooming Utility (reduce): To reduce the icon size on the  
desktop or the application window, press the 1 key while holding down the  
Fn key.  
TOSHIBA Zooming Utility (enlarge): To enlarge the icon size on the  
desktop or the application window, press the 2 key while holding down the  
Fn key.  
Fn Sticky key  
You can use the TOSHIBA Accessibility Utility to make the Fn key sticky,  
that is, you can press it once, release it, and then press an “F number” key.  
To start the TOSHIBA Accessibility Utility, click start, point to All  
Programs, point to TOSHIBA, point to Utilities and click Accessibility.  
5-6  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Keyboard  
Windows special keys  
The keyboard provides two keys that have special functions in Windows:  
Windows logo key activates the start menu and the other, the application  
key, has the same function as the secondary mouse button.  
This key activates the Windows start menu.  
This key has the same function as the secondary mouse button.  
Keypad overlay  
Your computer’s keyboard does not have an independent numeric keypad,  
but its numeric keypad overlay functions like one.  
The keys in the center of the keyboard with gray letters make up the  
numeric keypad overlay. The overlay provides the same functions as the  
numeric keypad on the 101/102-key enhanced keyboard in figure 5-2.  
Turning on the overlays  
The numeric keypad overlay can be used for numeric data input or cursor  
and page control.  
Arrow mode  
To turn on the Arrow mode, press Fn + F10. The Arrow mode indicator  
lights. Now try cursor and page control using the keys shown in figure 5-2.  
Press Fn + F10 again to turn off the overlay.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-7  
The Keyboard  
Numeric mode  
To turn on the Numeric mode, press Fn + F11. The Numeric mode  
indicator lights. Now try numeric data entry using the keys in figure below.  
Press Fn + F11 again to turn off the overlay.  
Figure 5-2 The numeric keypad overlay  
Temporarily using normal keyboard (overlay on)  
While using the overlay, you can temporarily access the normal keyboard  
without turning off the overlay:  
1. Hold Fn and press any other key. All keys will operate as if the overlay  
were off.  
2. Type upper-case characters by holding Fn + Shift and pressing a  
character key.  
3. Release Fn to continue using the overlay.  
Temporarily using overlay (overlay off)  
While using the normal keyboard, you can temporarily use the keypad  
overlay without turning it on:  
1. Press and hold down Fn.  
2. Check the keyboard indicators. Pressing Fn turns on the most recently  
used overlay. If the Numeric mode indicator lights, you can use the  
overlay for numeric entry. If the Arrow mode indicator lights, you can  
use the overlay for cursor and page control.  
3. Release Fn to return to normal keyboard operation.  
5-8  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Keyboard  
Temporarily changing modes  
If the computer is in Numeric mode, you can switch temporarily to Arrow  
mode by pressing a shift key.  
If the computer is in Arrow mode, you can switch temporarily to Numeric  
mode by pressing a shift key.  
Generating ASCII characters  
Not all ASCII characters can be generated using normal keyboard  
operation. But, you can generate these characters using their ASCII codes.  
With the overlay on:  
1. Hold down Alt.  
2. Using the overlay keys, type the ASCII code.  
3. Release Alt, and the ASCII character appears on the display screen.  
With the overlay off:  
1. Hold down Alt + Fn.  
2. Using the overlay keys, type the ASCII code.  
3. Release Alt + Fn, and the ASCII character appears on the display  
screen.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-9  
The Keyboard  
5-10  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Satellite U200/PORTÉGÉ M500  
Chapter 6  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
The computer’s power resources include the AC adaptor, battery pack and  
internal batteries. This chapter gives details on making the most effective  
use of these resources including charging and changing batteries, tips for  
saving battery power, and power up modes.  
Power conditions  
The computer’s operating capability and battery charge status are affected  
by the power conditions: whether an AC adaptor is connected, whether a  
battery pack is installed and what the charge level is for the battery.  
Table 6-1 Power conditions  
Power on  
Power off  
(no operation)  
AC  
adaptor  
connected  
Battery fully  
charged  
• Operates  
• LED: Battery blue  
• LED: Battery blue  
DC IN blue  
DC IN blue  
Battery partially • Operates  
charged or no  
• Quick charge  
• LED: Battery orange  
DC IN blue  
• Quick Charge  
charge  
• LED: Battery orange  
DC IN blue  
No battery  
installed  
• Operates  
• No charge  
• No charge  
• LED: Battery off  
DC IN blue  
• LED: Battery off  
DC IN blue  
User’s Manual  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
Table 6-1 Power conditions continued  
Power on  
Power off  
(no operation)  
AC  
adaptor  
not  
Battery charge  
is above low  
battery trigger  
• Operates  
• LED: Battery off  
DC IN off  
connected point  
Battery charge  
• Operates  
is below low  
battery trigger  
point  
• LED: Battery  
flashes orange  
DC IN off  
Battery charge Computer goes into  
is exhausted  
Hibernation Mode and  
shuts down  
No battery  
installed  
• Cannot operate  
• LED: Battery off  
DC IN off  
Power indicators  
As shown in the above table, the Battery, DC IN and Power indicators on  
the system indicator alert you to the computer’s operating capability and  
battery charge status.  
Battery indicator  
Check the Battery indicator to determine the status of the battery pack.  
The following indicator lights indicate the battery status:  
The battery charge is low. The AC adaptor must  
be connected to recharge the battery.  
Flashing orange  
Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and  
charging the battery.  
Orange  
Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and the  
battery is fully charged.  
Blue  
Under any other conditions, the indicator does  
not light.  
No light  
If the battery pack becomes too hot while it is being charged, the charge  
will stop and the Battery indicator will go out. When the battery pack’s  
temperature falls to a normal range, charge will resume. This occurs  
whether the computer’s power is on or off.  
6-2  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
DC IN indicator  
Check the DC IN indicator to determine the power status with the AC  
adaptor connected:  
Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and  
supplying proper power to the computer.  
Blue  
Indicates a problem with the power supply. Plug  
the AC adaptor into another power outlet. If it still  
does not operate properly, contact your dealer.  
Flashing orange  
Under any other conditions, the indicator does not  
light.  
No light  
Power indicator  
Check the Power indicator to determine the power status:  
Indicates power is being supplied to the computer  
and the computer is turned on.  
Blue  
Indicates power is being supplied to the computer  
while the computer is in Standby Mode. The  
indicator turns on for one second and off for two  
seconds.  
Blinking orange  
Under any other conditions, the indicator does not  
light.  
No light  
Battery types  
The computer has two types of batteries:  
■ Battery pack  
■ Real Time Clock (RTC) battery  
Battery pack  
When the AC adaptor is not connected, the computer’s main power source  
is a removable lithium ion battery pack, also referred to in this manual as  
the main battery. You can purchase additional battery packs for extended  
use of the computer away from an AC power source.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-3  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
Using a battery pack other than one supplied or specified by TOSHIBA  
(PA3356U) for this PC would interfere with the computer's display when  
open and could damage the LCD display panel.  
Do not change the battery pack while the AC adaptor is connected.  
Before you remove the battery pack, save your data and shut down the  
computer, or set the computer to Hibernation Mode. While entering  
Hibernation Mode, the computer saves the contents of memory to the hard  
disk drive. However, for safety sake, it is best to save your data manually.  
■ The battery pack is a lithium ion battery, which can explode if not  
properly replaced, used, handled or disposed of. Dispose of the battery  
as required by local ordinances or regulations. Use only batteries  
recommended by TOSHIBA as replacements.  
■ Always use the battery pack supplied as an accessory or an equivalent  
battery pack specified in the User's Manual. Other battery packs have  
different voltage and terminal polarities. Use of non-conforming battery  
packs could generate smoke or cause fire or rupture, possibly resulting  
in serious injury.  
■ Always dispose of used battery packs in compliance with all applicable  
laws and regulations. Put insulating tape, such as cellophane tape, on  
the electrode during transportation to avoid a possible short circuit, fire  
or electric shock. Failure to do so could possibly result in serious injury.  
■ Do not remove the battery pack while the computer is in Standby  
Mode. Data is stored in RAM, so if the computer loses power it will be  
lost. When the computer is powered off in Standby Mode, and the AC  
adaptor is not connected, the battery pack supplies power to maintain  
data and programs in memory. If the battery pack is completely  
discharged, Standby Mode will not function and the computer loses all  
data in memory.  
To ensure that the battery pack maintains its maximum capacity, operate  
the computer on battery power at least once a month until the battery pack  
is fully discharged. Refer to Extending battery life in this chapter for  
procedures. If the computer is continuously operated on AC power through  
an AC adaptor for an extended period, more than a month, the battery may  
fail to retain a charge. It may not function efficiently over the expected life of  
the battery and the Battery indicator may not indicate a low-battery  
condition.  
6-4  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
Real Time Clock (RTC) battery  
The Real Time Clock (RTC) battery provides power for the internal real  
time clock and calendar. It also maintains the system configuration.  
If the RTC battery becomes completely discharged, the system loses this  
data and the real time clock and calendar stop working. The following  
message appears when you turn on the power:  
S
**** RTC battery is low or CMOS checksum is  
inconsistent ****  
Press [F1] key to set Date/Time.  
You can change the Real Time Clock settings by pressing the F1 key.  
Refer to Chapter 9 Troubleshooting for the detail.  
The computer’s RTC battery is a Ni-MH battery and should be replaced  
only by your dealer or by a TOSHIBA service representative. The battery  
can explode if not properly replaced, used, handled or disposed of.  
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.  
Care and use of the battery pack  
The battery pack is a vital component of portable computing. Taking proper  
care of it will help ensure longer operating time on battery power as well as  
a longer life for your battery pack. Follow the instructions in this section  
carefully to ensure safe operation and maximum performance.  
Safety precautions  
Mishandling of battery packs can cause death, serious injury or property  
damage. Carefully observe the following advisories:  
Warning: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which could result in  
death or serious injury, if you do not follow instructions.  
Caution: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided,  
may result in moderate or minor injury or property damage.  
Note: Provides important information.  
Warning  
1. Never attempt to dispose of a battery pack by burning or by throwing it  
into a fire, and never allow exposure to a heating apparatus (e.g.,  
microwave oven). Heat can cause a battery pack to explode and  
possibly cause serious injury.  
2. Never attempt to disassemble, tamper with or repair a battery pack. The  
battery pack could overheat and ignite. Leakage of the caustic alkaline  
solution or other electrolytic substances could cause fire, possibly  
resulting in death or serious injury.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-5  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
3. Never short circuit the battery pack by either accidentally or intentionally  
bringing the battery terminals in contact with another conductive object.  
This could cause serious injury or a fire, and could also damage the  
battery pack. Always wrap the battery pack in plastic (or place it in a  
plastic bag) whenever transporting it, to avoid exposing the terminals to  
another conductive object which could result in serious injury. Always  
cover the metal terminals with insulating tape when disposing of the  
battery pack, to prevent accidental short circuiting which could result in  
serious injury.  
4. Never drive a nail or any other sharp object into the battery pack, hit  
battery pack with a hammer or other object or step on it. Doing so could  
cause a fire or explosion possibly resulting in serious injury.  
5. Never charge the battery pack by a method other than as instructed in  
the User's Manual. Doing so could cause a fire or explosion possibly  
resulting in serious injury.  
6. Never connect the battery pack to a plug socket or a car cigarette plug  
socket. The battery pack could rupture or ignite causing a fire or  
explosion possibly resulting in serious injury.  
7. Never allow a battery pack to become wet. A wet battery pack will  
overheat or ignite causing rupture or fire, possibly resulting in death or  
serious injury.  
8. Never store a battery pack in an area of high humidity. This could cause  
a fire or explosion possibly resulting in serious injury.  
9. Never expose a battery pack to abnormal shock, vibration or pressure.  
The battery pack's internal protective device could fail, causing it to  
overheat or ignite resulting in caustic liquid leakage, or explosion or fire,  
possibly resulting in death or serious injury.  
10. Never subject a battery pack to heat, and never store it or use it near a  
heat source. The battery pack could ignite or explode when heated or  
burned, possibly resulting in death or serious injury. Subjecting a battery  
pack to heat could also cause caustic liquid to leak. It can also cause  
failure, malfunction, or loss of stored data.  
11. Always use the battery pack supplied as an accessory or an equivalent  
battery pack specified in the User's Manual. Other battery packs have  
different voltage and terminal polarities. Use of non-conforming battery  
packs could generate smoke or cause fire or rupture, possibly resulting  
in serious injury.  
12. Never allow caustic electrolyte fluid leaked from the battery pack to  
contact your eyes, body or clothing. If caustic electrolyte fluid from the  
battery pack should contact your eyes, immediately wash your eyes with  
large amounts of running water and obtain prompt medical attention, to  
help prevent permanent eye damage. If electrolyte fluid should contact  
any part of your body, immediately wash it off under running water to  
help prevent skin rashes. If electrolyte fluid should contact your clothes,  
promptly remove them to help prevent the electrolyte fluid from  
contacting your body, possibly resulting in serious injury.  
6-6  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
13. Always immediately turn the power off and disconnect the power cable  
plug from the plug socket if you observe any of the following conditions:  
■ Offensive or unusual odor  
■ Excessive heat  
■ Discoloration  
■ Deformation  
■ Smoke  
■ Other unusual event during use, such as abnormal sound  
In such an event, immediately remove the battery pack from the PC. In  
some instances, you might have to wait for the PC to cool down before  
removing the battery pack, in order to avoid any possible minor injury  
due to heat exposure. Do not turn on the PC's power again until an  
authorized Toshiba service provider has checked it for safety.  
Continued use could cause a fire or rupture possibly resulting in serious  
injury or PC failure including but not limited to the loss of data.  
14. Always dispose of used battery packs in compliance with all applicable  
laws and regulations. Put insulating tape, such as cellophane tape, on  
the electrode during transportation to avoid a possible short circuit, fire  
or electric shock. Failure to do so could possibly result in serious injury.  
15. Make sure the battery is securely installed in the computer before  
attempting to charge the battery pack. Improper installation could  
generate smoke or fire, or cause the battery pack to rupture.  
16. Keep the battery pack out of reach of infants and children. It can cause  
injury.  
Caution  
1. Use only battery packs recommended by TOSHIBA as replacements.  
2. When installing a battery pack or before moving the PC, always make  
sure the battery pack is inserted correctly and securely. If the battery  
falls out, while you are carrying the PC, you could be injured or the  
battery pack could be damaged.  
3. Charge the battery pack only in an ambient temperature between 5 and  
35 degrees Celsius. Otherwise, the electrolyte solution might leak,  
battery pack performance might deteriorate and the battery life might be  
shortened.  
4. Never continue to use a battery pack after its recharging capability has  
become impaired, or after the warning message indicating that the  
battery pack power is exhausted has been displayed.  
5. Continued use of an exhausted or impaired battery pack could result in  
the loss of data or damage to PC.  
6. Never install or remove the battery pack without first turning off the  
power and disconnecting the AC adaptor. Never remove the battery  
pack while the computer is in Standby Mode. Data will be lost.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-7  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
Note  
1. Never remove the battery pack while the Wake-up on LAN function is  
enabled. Data will be lost. Before you remove a battery pack, disable  
the Wake-up on LAN function.  
2. To ensure the battery pack maintains maximum capacity, operate the  
computer on battery power once a week until the battery pack is fully  
discharged. Refer to the section Extending battery life in this chapter for  
procedures. If the computer is continuously operated on AC power for  
an extended period, more than a week, the battery might fail to retain a  
charge. It might not function efficiently over the expected life of the  
battery pack and the Battery indicator might not indicate a low-battery  
condition.  
3. After the battery pack is charged, avoid leaving the AC adaptor  
connected and the computer turned off for more than a few hours at a  
time. Continuing to charge a fully-charged battery pack can damage the  
battery.  
Charging the batteries  
When the power in the battery pack becomes low, the Battery indicator  
flashes orange indicating that only a few minutes of battery power remain.  
If you continue to use the computer while the Battery indicator flashes, the  
computer enables Hibernation Mode (so you don’t lose data) and  
automatically turns off.  
The computer enters Hibernate mode only if Hibernation is enabled in two  
places: the Hibernate tab in Power Options and Setup Actions tab in  
TOSHIBA Power Saver.  
You must recharge a battery pack when it becomes discharged.  
Procedures  
To recharge a battery pack while it is installed in the computer, connect the  
AC adaptor to the DC IN 15V jack and plug the other end into a working  
outlet.  
The Battery indicator glows orange when the battery is being charged.  
Use only the computer connected to an AC power source or the optional  
TOSHIBA Battery charger to charge the battery pack. Never attempt to  
charge the battery pack with any other charger.  
6-8  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
Time  
The following table shows the approximate time required to fully charge a  
discharged battery.  
Charging time (hours)  
Battery type  
Power on  
about 5.5 to 12.0 about 3.0  
8.0 Doesn't charge  
Power off  
Battery pack (4700mAh)  
RTC battery  
The charging time when the computer is on is affected by ambient  
temperature, the temperature of the computer and how you use the  
computer. If you make heavy use of external devices, for example, the  
battery might scarcely charge at all during operation. Refer also to the  
section Maximizing battery operating time.  
Battery charging notice  
The battery may not charge right away under the following conditions:  
■ The battery is extremely hot or cold. If the battery is extremely hot, it  
might not charge at all. To ensure the battery charges to its full  
capacity, charge the battery at room temperature of 10° to 30°C (50° to  
88°F).  
■ The battery is nearly completely discharged. Leave the AC adaptor  
connected for a few minutes and the battery should begin charging.  
The Battery indicator may show a rapid decrease in battery operating time  
when you try to charge a battery under the following conditions:  
■ The battery has not been used for a long time.  
■ The battery has completely discharged and been left in the computer  
for a long time.  
■ A cool battery is installed in a warm computer.  
In such case, follow the steps below.  
1. Fully discharge the battery by leaving it in the computer with the power  
on until the power automatically shuts off.  
2. Connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN 15V jack of the computer, and the  
AC adaptor into power outlet.  
3. Charge the battery until the Battery indicator glows blue.  
Repeat these steps two or three times until the battery recovers normal  
capacity.  
Leaving the AC adaptor connected will shorten battery life. At least once a  
month, run the computer on battery power until the battery is fully  
discharged, then recharge the battery.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-9  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
Monitoring battery capacity  
Remaining battery power can be monitored in TOSHIBA Power Saver.  
■ Wait at least 16 seconds after turning on the computer before trying to  
monitor the remaining operating time. The computer needs this time to  
check the battery’s remaining capacity and to calculate the remaining  
operating time, based on the current power consumption rate and  
remaining battery capacity. The actual remaining operating time may  
differ slightly from the calculated time.  
■ With repeated discharges and recharges, the battery’s capacity will  
gradually decrease. Therefore, an often used, older battery will not  
operate for as long as a new battery even when both are fully charged.  
In this case, TOSHIBA Power Saver will indicate a 100% charge for  
both the old and new battery, but the displayed estimated time  
remaining will be shorter for the older battery.  
Maximizing battery operating time  
A battery’s usefulness depends on how long it can supply power on a  
single charge.  
How long the charge lasts in a battery depends on:  
■ How you configure the computer (for example, whether you enable  
battery-power saving options). The computer provides a battery save  
mode, which can be set in TOSHIBA Power Saver, to conserve battery  
power. This mode has the following options:  
■ CPU Processing speed  
■ Screen brightness  
■ Cooling Method  
■ System standby  
■ System Hibernation  
■ Monitor Power off  
■ HDD Power off  
■ How often and how long you use the hard disk, optical disc and the  
floppy disk drive.  
■ How much charge the battery contained to begin with.  
■ How you use optional devices, such as a PC card, to which the battery  
supplies power.  
■ Enabling Standby Mode conserves battery power if you are frequently  
turning the computer off and on.  
■ Where you store your programs and data.  
■ Closing the LCD display panel when you are not using the keyboard  
saves power.  
■ Operating time decreases at low temperatures.  
■ The condition of the battery terminals. Make sure the battery terminals  
stay clean by wiping them with a clean dry cloth before installing the  
battery pack.  
6-10  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
Retaining data with power off  
When you turn off your computer with fully charged batteries, the batteries  
retain data for the following approximate time periods:  
Retention time  
Battery type  
State and Retention Time  
about 6 days (Standby Mode)  
about 60 days (Boot mode)  
Battery pack (4700mAh)  
30 days  
RTC battery  
Extending battery life  
To maximize the life of your battery pack:  
■ At least once a month, disconnect the computer from a power source  
and operate it on battery power until the battery pack fully discharges.  
Before doing so, follow the steps below.  
1. Turn off the computer’s power.  
2. Disconnect the AC adaptor and turn on the computer’s power. If it  
does not turn on go to step 4.  
3. Operate the computer on battery power for five minutes. If the  
battery pack has at least five minutes of operating time, continue  
operating until the battery pack is fully discharged. If the Battery  
indicator flashes or there is some other warning to indicate a low  
battery, go to step 4.  
4. Connect the AC adaptor to the computer and the power cord to a  
power outlet. The DC IN indicator should glow blue, and the  
Battery indicator should glow orange to indicate that the battery  
pack is being charged. If the DC IN indicator does not glow, power  
is not being supplied. Check the connections for the AC adaptor  
and power cord.  
5. Charge the battery pack until the Battery indicator glows blue.  
■ If you have extra battery packs, rotate their use.  
■ If you will not be using the system for an extended period, more than  
one month, remove the battery pack.  
■ Disconnect the AC adaptor when the battery is fully charged.  
Overcharging makes the battery hot and shortens life.  
■ If you are not going to use the computer for more than eight hours,  
disconnect the AC adaptor.  
■ Store spare battery packs in a cool dry place out of direct sunlight.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-11  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
Replacing the battery pack  
Using a battery pack other than one supplied or specified by TOSHIBA  
(PA3356U) for this PC would interfere with the computer's display when  
open and could damage the LCD display panel.  
The battery pack is classified as a consumable item.  
The operating life of the battery pack will gradually reduce through  
repeated charging and discharging. It will need to be replaced when it  
reaches the end of its operating life.  
You might also replace a discharged battery pack with a charged spare  
when you are operating your computer away from an AC power source.  
This section explains how to remove and install the battery pack.  
To remove a discharged battery pack, follow the steps below.  
■ Do not remove the battery pack while the computer is in Standby  
Mode. Data is stored in RAM, so if the computer loses power it will be  
lost.  
■ In Hibernation Mode, data will be lost if you remove the battery pack or  
disconnect the AC adaptor before the save is completed. Wait for the  
HDD indicator to go out.  
■ Do not touch the battery release latch while holding the computer or the  
battery pack might fall out due to the unintentional release of the  
battery release latch and cause injuries.  
1. Save your work.  
2. Turn the computer’s power off. Make sure the Power indicator is off.  
3. Remove all cables connected to the computer.  
4. Close the LCD display panel and turn the computer upside down.  
5. Slide the battery lock (1) to the unlock position ( ). (Move it completely  
to the left).  
6-12  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
6. Slide and hold the battery release latch (2) to disengage the battery  
pack, then remove the battery pack (3).  
Battery  
release latch  
Battery pack  
Battery lock  
Figure 6-1 Releasing the battery pack  
To install a battery pack, follow the steps below.  
Do not touch the battery release latch while holding the computer. Or you  
may get injured by the dropped battery pack by unintentional release of the  
battery release latch.  
Always use the Battery pack that was provided with your computer, or a  
compatible Battery pack.  
7. Insert the battery pack all the way to the end (1).  
8. Make sure that the battery pack is securely in place and the battery  
safety lock (2) is in the lock position ( ).  
Battery pack  
Battery lock  
Figure 6-2 Securing the battery pack  
9. Turn your computer over.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-13  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
TOSHIBA Password Utility  
The TOSHIBA Password Utility provides two levels of password security:  
User and Supervisor.  
Passwords set in TOSHIBA Password Utility are different from the  
Windows password.  
User Password  
To start the utility, point to or click the following items:  
start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities ->Password Utility  
The User Password dialog box contains two main fields: User Password  
and User Token.  
User authentication may be required to validate user rights when using  
TOSHIBA Password Utility to delete or change passwords, or create  
tokens, etc.  
User Password field  
■ Set (button)  
Click this button to register a password of up to 50 characters. After a  
password is set, you will be prompted to enter it when you start the  
computer.  
Check "Set the same string simultaneously as HDD User Password"  
when setting the HDD User Password.  
■ After you set the password, a dialog box will be displayed asking  
whether you want to save it to a floppy disk or other media. If you forget  
the password, you can open the password file on another computer. Be  
sure to keep the media in a safe place.  
■ When entering the character string to register the password, enter from  
the keyboard character by character and do not enter as ASCII code or  
copy-and-paste the character string. In addition, ensure that the  
registered password is correct by outputting the character string to the  
password file.  
■ The HDD password function supports only the Windows XP  
Professional model.  
■ Delete (button)  
Click this button to delete a registered password. Before you can delete  
a password, you must first enter the current password correctly or insert  
a proper token.  
Please use BIOS Setup to change or delete the HDD Passwords or to  
set the HDD Master Password.  
6-14  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
■ Change (button)  
Click this button to change a registered password. Before you can  
change a password, you must first enter the current password correctly  
or insert a proper token.  
Please use BIOS Setup to change or delete the HDD Passwords or to  
set the HDD Master Password.  
■ Owner String (text box)  
You can use this box to associate text with the password. After you  
enter text, click Apply or OK. When the computer is started, this text  
will be displayed together with the prompt asking you to enter a  
password.  
■ If you forget your HDD User Password, TOSHIBA will NOT be able to  
assist you, and your HDD will be rendered COMPLETELY and  
PERMANENTLY INOPERABLE. TOSHIBA will NOT be held  
responsible for any loss of any data, any loss of use or access to your  
HDD, or for any other losses to you or any other person or organization  
that result from the loss of access to your HDD. If you can’t accept this  
risk, don’t register the HDD User Password.  
■ When setting the HDD Master Password or the password for the Ultra  
Slim Bay HDD, save the HDD User Password settings in the BIOS  
SETUP Program.  
■ When saving the HDD User Password shut down or restart the  
computer. If the computer is not shut down or restarted, the saved data  
may not be correctly reflected. For more information on shutting down  
or restarting the computer, refer to Turning on the power in Chapter 3.  
■ The HDD password function supports only the Windows XP  
Professional model.  
■ Refer to Starting and Ending the BIOS Setup Program section in  
Chapter 7 for more information.  
User Token field  
■ Create (button)  
You can use an SD card token, instead of entering the password. After  
you have registered a password, insert an SD card in SD card slot and  
click Create. You can use an SD card of any capacity, but it must be  
formatted correctly.  
If an unformatted card or one with an incompatible format is inserted,  
you will be prompted to format it with a tool named TOSHIBA SD  
Memory Card Format. To start the format tool, point to or click the  
following items:  
start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> SD Memory  
Card Format  
When you format an SD Memory card, all data will be deleted. Be sure to  
save data on the card to other media before you format the card.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-15  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
■ Disable (button)  
Click this button to invalidate the token. You cannot re-validate old  
tokens, but you can use the same SD cards to create new tokens.  
After using the token created for authentication, do not leave it inserted in  
the SD card slot, ensure that the token is removed from the slot and stored  
in a safe location. If the token is left in the slot, there is a danger of theft or  
a third party using it for authentication and operating the user's computer  
(resulting in extraction, modification or deletion of data) when the user is  
not at their desk.  
Supervisor Password  
If you set a Supervisor Password, some functions might be restricted when  
a user logs on with the User Password. To set a Supervisor Password,  
execute the file TOSPU.EXE. The file is located at:  
C:\Program Files\Toshiba\Windows Utilities\SVPWTool\TOSPU.EXE  
This utility lets you do the following:  
■ Register, delete or change the Supervisor Password.  
■ Create or invalidate a Supervisor Password token.  
This function in the TOSHIBA Password Utility lets you invalidate only  
supervisor tokens or all tokens, including user and supervisor tokens.  
■ Specify restrictions for general users.  
Starting the computer by password  
If you have already registered a password, there are three ways to start the  
computer:  
■ Insert an SD card token before you turn on the computer. The computer  
will start normally, without displaying a password prompt.  
■ Swipe your fingerprint on the sensor if you have already registered the  
fingerprint with the Fingerprint Utility and enabled Fingerprint power-on  
security. If you would not like to swipe your finger or cannot  
authenticate the fingerprint for some reasons, push the BkSp key to  
skip the fingerprint authentication screen. You can try to swipe the  
fingerprint up to five times. If you failed fingerprint authentication more  
than five times, you must enter the password manually to start the  
computer.  
■ Enter the password manually.  
The password is necessary only if the computer was shut down in boot  
mode. It is not needed in Standby Mode.  
To enter a password manually, follow these steps:  
1. Turn on the power as described in Chapter 3, Getting Started. The  
following message will appear in the LCD:  
S
2. Enter the Password.  
Password=  
6-16  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
3. Press Enter.  
If you enter the password incorrectly three times in a row, the computer  
shuts off. In this case, you must turn the computer back on to retry  
password entry.  
Power-up modes  
The computer has the following power-up modes:  
■ Boot: Computer shuts down without saving data. Always save your  
work before you turn the computer off in boot mode.  
■ Hibernation: Data in memory is saved to the hard disk drive.  
■ Standby: Data is maintained in the computer’s memory.  
Refer also to the sections Turning on the power and Turning off the power  
in Chapter 3, Getting Started.  
Windows utilities  
You can configure various settings associated with both Standby Mode and  
Hibernation Mode within TOSHIBA Power Saver.  
Hot keys  
You can use hot keys Fn + F3 to enter Standby Mode and Fn + F4 to enter  
Hibernation. Refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard for details.  
Panel power on/off  
You can set up your computer so that power turns off automatically when  
you close the display panel. When you open the display panel, power will  
be turned on in Standby Mode or Hibernation Mode but not in boot mode.  
If the panel power off function is enabled and you manually shut down  
Windows, do not close the computer’s LCD display panel until the shut  
down process has been completed.  
System Auto Off  
This feature turns the system off automatically if it is not used for a set  
duration. The system shuts down in Standby Mode or Hibernation Mode in  
Windows.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-17  
Power and Power-Up Modes  
6-18  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Satellite U200/PORTÉGÉ M500  
Chapter 7  
HW Setup  
This chapter explains how to use TOSHIBA HW Setup program to  
configure your computer, and provides information on setting up the  
Execute-Disable Bit Capability and TPM.  
Accessing HW Setup  
To run HW Setup, click start, click Control Panel, click Printers and  
Other Hardware and select TOSHIBA HWSetup.  
HW Setup window  
The HW Setup window contains the following tabs: General, Display, Boot  
Priority, Keyboard, CPU, LAN, Device Config and USB.  
There are also three buttons: OK, Cancel and Apply.  
OK  
Accepts your changes and closes the HW Setup  
window.  
Cancel  
Apply  
Closes the window without accepting your  
changes.  
Accepts all your changes without closing the HW  
Setup window.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-1  
HW Setup  
General  
This window displays the BIOS version and contains two buttons: Default  
and About.  
Default  
Return all HW Setup values to the factory  
settings.  
About  
Display the HW Setup version.  
Setup  
This field displays BIOS Versionand date.  
Display  
This tab lets you customize your computer’s display settings for either the  
internal LCD screen or for an external monitor.  
Power On Display  
Lets you select the display to be used when the computer is booted. (This  
setting is only available on Standard VGA mode and is not available on  
Windows Desktop properties).  
Auto-Selected  
Selects an external monitor if one is connected.  
Otherwise, it selects the internal LCD (Default).  
LCD + Analog RGB Selects both the internal LCD and external  
monitor for simultaneous display.  
If the connected external monitor does not support the computer's current  
video mode, selecting the LCD + Analog RGB mode will not display any  
image on the external monitor.  
When Windows starts up, the screen will be displayed on the external  
monitor if it was connected when the notebook was previously switched off  
and is still connected when the computer is switched on. Otherwise, the  
screen will be displayed on the internal LCD.  
7-2  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HW Setup  
Boot Priority  
Boot Priority Options  
This option sets the priority for booting the computer. Select from the  
following settings:  
HDD −> FDD −> CD-  
ROM −> LAN  
The computer looks for bootable files in the  
1
following order: HDD, floppy disk drive* , CD-  
2
ROM* and LAN (Default).  
FDD −> HDD −> CD-  
ROM −> LAN  
The computer looks for bootable files in the  
1
following order: floppy disk drive* , HDD, CD-  
2
ROM* and LAN.  
HDD −> CD-ROM −>  
LAN −> FDD  
The computer looks for bootable files in the  
2
following order: HDD, CD-ROM* , LAN and  
1
floppy disk drive* .  
FDD −> CD-ROM −>  
LAN −> HDD  
The computer looks for bootable files in the  
following order: floppy disk drive* , CD-ROM* ,  
LAN and HDD.  
1
2
CD-ROM −> LAN −>  
HDD −> FDD  
The computer looks for bootable files in the  
2
following order: CD-ROM* , LAN, HDD, floppy  
1
disk drive* .  
CD-ROM −> LAN −>  
FDD −> HDD  
The computer looks for bootable files in the  
2
following order: CD-ROM* , LAN, floppy disk  
1
drive* and HDD.  
You can override the settings and manually select a boot device by  
pressing one of the following keys while the computer is booting:  
U
N
1
Selects the USB floppy disk drive.  
Selects the network.  
Selects the HDD.  
2
C
M
Selects the CD-ROM* .  
Selects the USB Memory.  
1
* The floppy disk drive will be used to start the computer when there is a  
bootable disk contained in the external drive. If SD memory is installed as  
well, the external floppy disk drive will be checked first, followed by the SD  
memory device itself.  
2
* The optical disc drive will be used to start the computer when there is a  
bootable disk contained in the drive.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-3  
HW Setup  
To change the boot drive, follow the steps below.  
1. Hold down F12 and boot the computer.  
2. The following menu will be displayed with the following icons: Built-in  
HDD, CD-ROM, FDD (or SD memory card), Network (LAN), USB  
Memory boot.  
A bar will appear only under the selected device.  
3. Use the left/right cursor keys to highlight the boot device you want and  
press Enter.  
■ If only a Supervisor Password has been set, the following should be  
noted:  
■ The boot device menu will appear when the “Able to run HW Setup”  
option has been configured.  
■ The boot device menu will not appear when the “Unable to run HW  
Setup” option has been configured.  
■ If both a Supervisor Password and a User Password are set, the  
following should be noted:  
■ The boot device menu will appear when you use either the  
Supervisor Password or the User Password to start the computer,  
and the “Able to run HW Setup” option has been configured.  
■ The boot device menu will not appear when you use the User  
Password to start the computer and the “Unable to run HW Setup”  
option has been configured.  
■ The boot device menu will appear when you use the Supervisor  
Password to start the computer, even if the “Unable to run HW  
Setup” option has been configured.  
The boot device selection methods described above will not change the  
boot priority settings that have been configured in HW Setup. In addition, if  
you press a key other than one of those listed, or if the selected device is  
not installed, the system will continue to boot according to the current and  
available settings in HW Setup.  
7-4  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HW Setup  
HDD Priority Options  
Set the priority of the HDD as a startup device.  
Built-in HDD ->  
USB (Default)  
The priority is set as built-in HDD -> USB.  
USB -> Built-in  
HDD  
The priority is set as USB memory -> built-in  
HDD.  
USB Memory BIOS Support Type  
Set the type of the USB memory as a startup device.  
HDD  
Set the type of the USB memory to be equivalent  
to the HDD (Default).  
* Based on the HDD order in the Boot Priority  
Options item. The order with respect to the other  
HDD can be set in the HDD Priority Options  
item.  
FDD  
Set the type of the USB memory to be equivalent  
to the FDD.  
* Based on the FDD order in the Boot Priority  
Options item.  
Network Boot Protocol  
This feature sets the protocol to remotely boot from the network.  
Network Boot Protocol is not displayed for Gigabit Ethernet LAN.  
[PXE]Sets PXE as the protocol (Default).  
[RPL]Sets RPL as the protocol.  
Keyboard  
Wake-up on Keyboard  
When this feature is enabled and the computer is in Standby Mode, you  
can turn on the computer by pressing any key. It is effective only for the  
internal keyboard and only when the computer is in Standby Mode.  
Enabled  
Enables the Wake-up on Keyboard function.  
Disabled  
Disables the Wake-up on Keyboard function (Default).  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-5  
HW Setup  
CPU  
This function lets you set the CPU operating mode.  
This option is displayed only on models with an Intel® CoreTM Duo  
processor and Intel® CoreTM Solo processor.  
Dynamic CPU Frequency Mode  
This option lets you choose from the following settings:  
Dynamically  
Switchable  
CPU power consumption and clock speed  
automatic switching function is enabled. When  
the computer is in use, CPU operation is  
automatically switched when necessary  
(Default).  
Always High  
Always Low  
CPU power consumption and clock speed  
automatic switching function is disabled. The  
CPU always runs at its fastest speed.  
CPU power consumption and clock speed  
automatic switching function is disabled. The  
CPU always runs at low power consumption and  
low speed.  
LAN  
Wake-up on LAN  
This feature lets the computer’s power be turned on when it receives a  
wake-up signal from the LAN.  
Enabled  
Enables Wake-up on LAN.  
Disabled  
Disables Wake-up on LAN (Default).  
Do not install or remove an optional memory module while Wake-up on  
LAN is enabled.  
The Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even when the system is  
off. Leave the AC adaptor connected while using this feature.  
Built-in LAN  
This feature enables or disables the Built-in LAN.  
Enabled  
Enables Built-in LAN functions (Default).  
Disables Built-in LAN functions.  
Disabled  
7-6  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HW Setup  
Device Config  
Device Configuration  
This option lets you set the device configuration.  
All Devices  
Setup by OS  
BIOS sets all devices.  
Operating system sets devices that it can control  
(Default).  
USB  
USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation  
Use this option to enable or disable USB keyboard/mouse legacy  
emulation. If your operating system does not support USB, you can still use  
a USB mouse and keyboard by setting the USB KB/Mouse Legacy  
Emulationitem to Enabled.  
Enabled  
Enables the USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation  
function (Default).  
Disabled  
Disables the USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation  
function.  
USB-FDD Legacy Emulation  
Use this option to enable or disable USB floppy disk drive legacy  
emulation. If your operating system does not support USB, you can still use  
a USB floppy disk drive by setting the USB-FDD Legacy Emulationitem  
to Enabled.  
Enabled  
Enables the USB floppy disk drive legacy  
emulation function (Default).  
Disabled  
Disables the USB floppy disk drive legacy  
emulation function.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-7  
HW Setup  
Configuring the Execute-Disable Bit Capability and  
TPM  
The configurations for the Execute-Disable Bit Capability and TPM are  
carried out in the BIOS setup program.  
These functions are provided with some models.  
Notes before using the BIOS Setup  
■ In most cases, changes to the system's configuration should be made  
within Windows by using applications such as TOSHIBA HW Setup,  
TOSHIBA Password Utility, TOSHIBA Power Saver, Windows  
Device Manager and so forth. If you make changes to the  
configuration through the BIOS setup program, please be aware that  
the configuration set through the Windows applications will take  
priority.  
■ Changes to the settings within the BIOS setup program will not be  
erased even if the power supply is switched off and the main battery  
removed. However, if the built-in Real Time Clock (RTC) battery runs  
out of power, most of the settings will revert back to their default  
values. However, please note that the following items will not be  
affected in this instance:  
• Password  
• Hard Disk Drive Password  
• Security controller  
• Fingerprint patterns  
Starting and Ending the BIOS Setup Program  
Starting the BIOS Setup Program  
1. Switch on your computer while pressing the Esc key.  
If “Password =” is displayed, enter either the Supervisor Password, if  
one is set, or the User Password and press the Enter key.  
Please refer to Chapter 6, the TOSHIBA Password Utility, for details  
about the User Password.  
The “Check system. Then press [F1] key.” message is  
displayed.  
2. Press the F1 key.  
The BIOS setup program will start up.  
Select either the Execute-Disable Bit Capability or settings in the security  
controller to make changes. Please refer to the operating instructions  
displayed in the settings screen.  
7-8  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HW Setup  
Ending the BIOS Setup Program  
Save the changes and end the program.  
1. Press the End Key.  
The “Are you sure? (Y/N) The changes you made will  
cause the system to reboot.” message is displayed.  
2. Press the Y key.  
The configured settings are saved and the BIOS setup program ends.  
The computer may reboot depending on the settings that were  
modified.  
Ending the BIOS Setup Program Halfway  
The configuration settings can be terminated halfway without saving any of  
the changes made.  
1. Press the Esc key.  
The “Exit without saving? (Y/N)” message is displayed.  
2. Press the Y key.  
The BIOS setup program will end.  
Core Multi - Processing  
The Core Multi-Processing sets the CPU operating mode.  
This option is displayed only on models with an Intel® CoreTM Duo processor.  
Enabled is Dual Core mode.  
Disabled is Single Core mode.  
Enabled  
Enables Core Multi - Processing functions  
(Default).  
Disabled  
Disables Core Multi - Processing functions.  
Virtualization Technology  
Virtualization Technology sets enable or disable of the Intel Virtualization  
Technology installed in the CPU.  
Intel Virtualization Technology is the technique that allows one machine to  
operate as multiple virtual machines.  
The Virtualization Technology is supported with some models.  
The Disabled command does not allow use of the Intel Virtualization  
Technology.  
The Enabled command allows use of the Intel Virtualization Technology.  
Enabled  
Enables Virtualization Technology.  
Disabled  
Disables Virtualization Technology (Default).  
Enhanced C-States  
This feature enables or disables the Enhanced C-States.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-9  
HW Setup  
This option is displayed only on models with an Intel® CoreTM Duo  
processor and Intel® CoreTM Solo processor.  
Enabled  
This lowers the power consumption (Default).  
This does not lower the power consumption.  
Disabled  
Execute-Disable Bit Capability  
This setting, which is displayed on the first page of the setup screen,  
configures the Execute-Disable Bit function of the CPU. This function is  
specific to Intel processors and, when activated, helps to reduce security  
threats to the computer by preventing certain classes of malicious 'buffer  
overflow' attacks when combined with a supporting operating system such  
as Windows XP.  
Available  
Makes the processor's Execute-Disable Bit  
Capability available for use.  
Not Available  
Disables the processor's Execute-Disable Bit  
Capability so that it is not available for use.  
(Default).  
System configuration changes, other than changes to this setting, should  
be made within Windows by using applications such as TOSHIBA HW  
Setup, TOSHIBA Password Utility, TOSHIBA Power Saver, Windows  
Device Manager and so forth.  
LCD Display Stretch  
Select the display function of the LCD.  
Enabled  
Display modes with low resolution are stretched  
and displayed (Default).  
Disabled  
Display modes with low resolution are not  
stretched and displayed in their original state.  
Security controller  
The security controller settings are available in SYSTEM SETUP (2/2).  
TPM  
This setting enables or disables the security controller known as TPM  
(Trusted Platform Module).  
Enabled  
Enables the TPM.  
Disabled  
Disables the TPM (Default).  
7-10  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HW Setup  
Clear TPM Owner  
This setting is used to erase the data in TPM when disposing of the  
computer or when the owner of the computer changes, etc. Once this  
operation is carried out, the TPM configuration settings are erased, such  
that the encrypted data can no longer be decrypted and the files can no  
longer be read. Please backup or delete the data as necessary before  
carrying out this operation.  
The operating procedure is as follows:  
1. Move the cursor to the Clear TPM Owner setting and press the Space  
key or BkSp key.  
2. A message is displayed. Press the Y, E, S, and Enter keys and the  
TPM information is erased.  
3. The TPM setting changes from being displayed as Enable to Disabled,  
and the setting is no longer displayed.  
■ System configuration changes other than changes to this setting  
should be made in Windows using TOSHIBA HW Setup, TOSHIBA  
Password Utility, TOSHIBA Power Saver, Device Manager, etc.  
■ When using TPM, please install the Infineon TPM Installation Guide  
from the TOSHIBA Application Installer.  
Please ensure that the user reads the Infineon TPM Installation  
Guide as it contains usage information and notes on using TPM.  
Diagnostic Mode  
Set whether the BIOS Setup Diagnostic test is enabled.  
Disabled  
The Diagnostic test is disabled.  
(Default)  
Enabled  
The Diagnostic test is enabled.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-11  
HW Setup  
7-12  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Satellite U200/PORTÉGÉ M500  
Chapter 8  
Optional Devices  
Optional devices can expand the computer’s capabilities and its versatility.  
This chapter describes connection or installation of the following devices,  
which are available from your TOSHIBA dealer:  
Cards/memory  
■ PC card  
■ Bridge media slot  
■ SD card (SD memory card, SDIO card)  
■ Memory Stick/Memory Stick Pro  
■ xD picture card  
■ MultiMediaCard  
■ Memory expansion  
Power devices  
■ Battery pack  
■ Universal AC adaptor  
■ Battery charger  
Peripheral devices  
■ USB floppy disk drive  
■ External monitor  
■ i.LINK (IEEE1394)  
■ Bluetooth USB Adaptor  
■ Wireless Optical Mouse with Bluetooth Technology  
■ Wireless Stereo Headset with Bluetooth Technology  
Other  
■ Security lock  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-1  
Optional Devices  
PC card  
The computer is equipped with a PC card slot that can accommodate a  
Type II card. Any PC card that meets industry standards (manufactured by  
TOSHIBA or other vendor) can be installed. The slot supports 16-bit PC  
cards, including PC card 16’s multifunction card and CardBus PC cards.  
CardBus supports the new standard of 32-bit PC cards. The bus provides  
superior performance for the greater demands of multimedia data  
transmission.  
PC cards can sometimes become hot during PC operation. Before you  
remove a PC card always wait for it to cool. You could get burned  
removing a hot PC card.  
Inserting a PC card  
Windows hot-install feature lets you insert PC cards while the computer’s  
power is on.  
Do not insert a PC card while the computer is in standby or Hibernation  
Mode. Some cards might not work properly.  
To insert a PC card, follow the steps below:  
1. Insert a PC card in the PC card slot.  
2. Press gently to ensure a firm connection.  
PC card slot  
PC card  
Figure 8-1 Inserting the PC card  
3. After inserting the PC card, refer to the PC card’s documentation and  
check the configuration in Windows to make sure it is appropriate for  
your PC card.  
8-2  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Optional Devices  
Removing a PC card  
To remove the PC card, follow the steps below.  
1. Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Task Bar.  
2. Point to PC card and click.  
3. Press the PC card eject button to extend it.  
If the PC card is not inserted all the way, the eject button may not cause it  
to pop out sufficiently to allows it to be grasped. Be sure to push the PC  
card firmly into the computer and slide the eject button again.  
4. Press the extended eject button to pop the card out slightly.  
5. Grasp the PC card and draw it out.  
PC card  
eject button  
PC card  
Figure 8-2 Removing the PC card  
Bridge media slot  
This slot lets you insert SD memory card, SDIO card, Memory Stick (Pro),  
xD picture card and MultiMediaCard.  
This Bridge media slot supports the following cards.  
■ SD card (SD memory card, SDIO card)  
■ Memory Stick  
■ Memory Stick PRO  
■ xD picture card  
■ MultiMediaCard  
Precautions on using cards.  
Please note that not all cards have been tested and verified to work  
correctly. Therefore, it is not possible to guarantee that all cards will  
operate properly.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-3  
Optional Devices  
Media care  
Observe the following precautions when handling the card.  
Card care  
■ Do not twist or bend cards.  
■ Do not expose cards to liquids or store in humid areas or lay media  
close to containers of liquid.  
■ Do not touch the metal part of a card or expose it to liquids or let it get  
dirty.  
■ After using card, return it to its case.  
■ The card is designed so that it can be inserted only one way. Do not try  
to force the card into the slot.  
■ Do not leave a card partially inserted in the slot. Press the card until you  
hear it click into place.  
Memory card care  
■ Set the write-protect switch to the lock position, if you do not want to  
record data.  
■ Memory cards are consumable items, so make sure you back up  
important data.  
■ Do not write to a Memory card if the battery power is low. Low power  
could affect writing accuracy.  
■ Do not remove a Memory card while read/write is in progress.  
For more details on using memory cards, see manuals accompanying the  
cards.  
SD card  
Set the SD-card type SD memory cards and BluetoothTM SDIO cards in the  
Bridge Media slot.  
Keep foreign objects out of the Bridge media slot. Never allow metal  
objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to enter the PC or  
keyboard. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can  
cause PC damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.  
Inserting an SD card  
To insert an SD card, follow the steps below.  
1. Insert an SD card in the Bridge media slot.  
8-4  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Optional Devices  
2. Press gently to ensure a firm connection.  
Bridge media slot  
SD card  
Figure 8-3 Inserting an SD card  
■ Make sure the SD card is oriented properly before you insert it.  
■ Do not turn the computer off or switch to Standby Mode or Hibernate  
Mode while files are being copied - doing so may cause data to be lost.  
Removing an SD card  
To remove an SD card, follow the steps below.  
1. Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Task Bar.  
2. Point to SD card and click.  
3. Push in the card and release it to pop the card out slightly.  
4. Grasp the card and remove it.  
Bridge media slot  
SD card  
Figure 8-4 Removing an SD card  
■ Make sure the Bridge media slot indicator is out before you remove  
the SD card or turn off the computer’s power. If you remove the SD  
card or turn off the power while the computer is accessing the SD card  
you may lose data or damage the card.  
■ Do not remove an SD card while the computer is in Standby or  
Hibernation mode. The computer could become unstable or data in the  
SD card could be lost.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-5  
Optional Devices  
SD memory card  
SD cards let you easily transfer data from devices, such as digital cameras  
and Personal Digital Assistants, that use SD card flash-memory. The cards  
have a high level of security and copy protection features.  
SD memory cards comply with SDMI (Secure Digital Music Initiative),  
which is a technology adopted to prevent unlawful copy or playback of  
digital music. For this reason, you cannot copy or playback protected  
material on another computer or other device. You may not use the  
reproduction of any copyrighted material except for your personal  
enjoyment.  
Formatting an SD card  
SD memory cards are sold already formatted in conformity to specific  
standards. If you format the SD card again, be sure to format it with the  
TOSHIBA SD memory card format utility, not with the format commands  
provided within Windows.  
In order to run TOSHIBA SD memory card format, click start, point to All  
Programs, point to TOSHIBA, point to Utilities and click SD memory card  
Format.  
The TOSHIBA SD memory card format utility does not format the protected  
area of the SD memory card. Should you need to format all areas of the  
memory card, including the protected area, you will need to obtain an  
appropriate application that applies the copy protection system.  
SDIO card  
Add the BluetoothTM wireless communication function to a computer with  
the SDIO card.  
Memory Stick/Memory Stick Pro  
The computer is equipped with a Bridge media slot that can accommodate  
Memory Stick/Memory Stick Pro flash memory cards with various memory  
capacities. Memory Stick let you easily transfer data from devices, such as  
digital cameras and Personal Digital Assistants, that use Memory Stick  
technology.  
Keep foreign objects out of the Bridge media slot. Never allow metal  
objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to enter the PC or  
keyboard. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can  
cause PC damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.  
■ The slot does not support Magic Gate functions.  
■ Memory Stick Duo/PRO Duo and the Memory Stick adaptor are not  
compatible with the Bridge media slot. Do not insert Memory Stick Duo/  
PRO Duo into the slot. Data may be lost or damaged if you use any  
card other than those supported.  
8-6  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Optional Devices  
Write protection  
Memory Stick can be write protected to safeguard your data. To write-  
protect a Memory Stick, slide the lock on the back of the Memory Stick to  
the lock position.  
Inserting a Memory Stick  
To insert a Memory Stick, follow the steps below.  
1. Insert the Memory Stick into the Bridge media slot.  
2. Press gently to ensure a firm connection.  
Bridge media slot  
Memory Stick  
Figure 8-5 Inserting a Memory Stick  
Removing a Memory Stick  
To remove a Memory Stick, follow the steps below.  
1. Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Task Bar.  
2. Point to Memory Stick and click.  
3. Push in the card and release it to pop the card out slightly.  
4. Grasp the card and remove it.  
■ Make sure the Bridge media slot indicator is out before you remove  
the Memory Stick or turn off the computer's power. If you remove the  
Memory Stick or turn off the power while the computer is accessing the  
Memory Stick you may lose data or damage the card.  
■ Do not remove a Memory Stick while the computer is in Standby or  
Hibernation mode. The computer could become unstable or data in the  
Memory Stick could be lost.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-7  
Optional Devices  
xD picture card  
The computer is equipped with a Bridge media slot that can accommodate  
xD picture cards with various memory capacities. The xD picture card let  
you easily transfer data from devices, such as digital cameras that use xD  
picture card flash-memory.  
Keep foreign objects out of the Bridge media slot. Never allow metal  
objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to enter the PC or  
keyboard. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can  
cause PC damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.  
Inserting an xD picture card  
To insert an xD picture card, follow the steps below.  
1. Insert the xD picture card into the Bridge media slot.  
2. Press gently to ensure a firm connection.  
Bridge media slot  
xD picture card  
Figure 8-6 Inserting an xD picture card  
Removing an xD picture card  
To remove an xD picture card, follow the steps below.  
1. Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Task Bar.  
2. Point to xD picture card and click.  
3. Push in the card and release it to pop the card out slightly.  
4. Grasp the card and remove it.  
■ Make sure the Bridge media slot indicator is out before you remove  
the xD picture card or turn off the computer's power. If you remove the  
xD picture card or turn off the power while the computer is accessing  
the xD picture card you may lose data or damage the card.  
■ Do not remove an xD picture card while the computer is in Standby or  
Hibernation mode. The computer could become unstable or data in the  
xD picture card could be lost.  
8-8  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Optional Devices  
MultiMediaCard  
The computer is equipped with the Bridge media slot that can  
accommodate MultiMediaCard flash memory technology with various  
memory capacities. MultiMediaCards let you easily transfer data from  
devices, such as digital cameras and Personal Digital Assistants, that use  
MultiMediaCard flash-memory. The cards have a high level of security and  
copy protection features.  
Keep foreign objects out of the Bridge media slot. Never allow metal  
objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to enter the PC or  
keyboard. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can  
cause PC damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.  
MultiMediaCards comply with SDMI (Secure Digital Music Initiative), which  
is a technology adopted to prevent unlawful copy or playback of digital  
music. For this reason, you cannot copy or playback protected material on  
another computer or other device. You may not use the reproduction of  
any copyrighted material except for your personal enjoyment.  
Inserting a MultiMediaCard  
To insert a MultiMediaCard, follow the steps below.  
1. Insert the MultiMediaCard into the Bridge media slot.  
2. Press gently to ensure a firm connection.  
Bridge media slot  
MultiMediaCard  
Figure 8-7 Inserting a MultiMediaCard  
Make sure the MultiMediaCard is oriented properly before you insert it.  
Removing a MultiMediaCard  
To remove a MultiMediaCard, follow the steps below.  
1. Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Task Bar.  
2. Point to MultiMediaCard and click.  
3. Push in the card and release it to pop the card out slightly.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-9  
Optional Devices  
4. Grasp the card and remove it.  
Bridge media slot  
MultiMediaCard  
Figure 8-8 Removing a MultiMediaCard  
■ Make sure the Bridge media slot indicator is out before you remove  
the MultiMediaCard or turn off the computer’s power. If you remove the  
MultiMediaCard or turn off the power while the computer is accessing  
the MultiMediaCard you may lose data or damage the card.  
■ Do not remove a MultiMediaCard while the computer is in Standby or  
Hibernation mode. The computer could become unstable or data in the  
MultiMediaCard could be lost.  
Memory expansion  
You can install additional memory in the computer’s memory module slot to  
increase the amount of RAM.  
The maximum amount of memory modules (2-slot total) that can be  
installed to the computer varies by computer model.  
■ Intel® 945GM model: 4,096 MB  
■ Intel® 940GML model: 2,048 MB  
This section describes how to install and remove a memory module.  
■ Place a mat beneath the computer to prevent scratching or damaging  
the computer's lid when installing/replacing the memory module. Avoid  
mats made of materials that generate static electricity.  
■ When you install or remove a memory module, ensure that you do not  
touch any other internal areas of the computer.  
8-10  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Optional Devices  
■ Use only memory modules approved by TOSHIBA.  
■ Do not try to install or remove a memory module under the following  
conditions as you can damage the computer and/or the module, and  
you risk losing data:  
a. The computer is turned on.  
b. The computer was shut down using either Standby Mode or  
Hibernation Mode.  
c. Wake-up on LAN is enabled.  
■ Be careful not to let screws or other foreign matter fall into the  
computer. It could cause malfunction or electric shock.  
■ Expansion memory is a precision electronic component that may be  
fatally damaged by static electricity. Since the human body can carry  
static electricity, it is important that you discharge yourself before  
touching or installing any expansion memory modules. To discharge  
your body’s static electricity, simply touch any metal close to you with  
bare hands.  
If you install a memory module that is not compatible with the computer, a  
beep will sound when you turn on the power. If the incompatible module is  
installed in slot A, there will be a long beep (1 second) followed by one  
short beep (0.5 seconds), while if the incompatible module is in slot B, there  
will be a long beep followed by two short beeps. In the event both modules  
are incompatible, there will be a long beep followed by one short beep, a  
pause, and then a long beep followed by two short beeps. In all instances  
you should shut down the computer and remove the incompatible  
module(s).  
Use a point size1 Phillips screwdriver to remove and fasten the screws.  
Use of an incorrect screwdriver can damage the screw heads.  
Installing memory module  
There are slots for two memory modules, one over the other. The  
procedures are the same for installing either module.  
1. Set the computer to boot mode and turn the computer’s power off.  
Make sure the Power indicator is off. Refer to the Turning off the power  
section in Chapter 3, Getting Started.  
2. Remove AC adaptor and all cables connected to the computer.  
3. Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack. Refer to  
Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up  
Modes, for details.  
4. Turn your computer over.  
5. Slide the display latch on the front of the computer and open the LCD  
display panel.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-11  
Optional Devices  
6. Slip your finger under a notch at the end of the keyboard brace and lift  
up to release latches and remove the keyboard brace.  
Keyboard brace  
Figure 8-9 Removing the keyboard brace  
7. Remove two screws securing the keyboard.  
Use a point size 1 Phillips screwdriver.  
8. Lift up the back of the keyboard, rotate it toward you and lay in face  
down on the palm rest.  
■ When you move the keyboard forward, do not touch the keys. Doing so  
could cause misalignment. Hold the keyboard by the sides and lay it  
gently on the palm rest.  
■ The keyboard is connected to the computer by a keyboard ribbon  
cable. Be careful not to apply tension to this cable when you lift up the  
keyboard. Do not try to disconnect this cable.  
Screws  
Figure 8-10 Removing two screws and rotate the keyboard  
8-12  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Optional Devices  
9. Remove the two screws and take off the memory module cover.  
Screws  
Memory module cover  
Figure 8-11 Removing the memory module cover  
■ Do not touch the connectors on the memory module or on the  
computer. Debris on the connectors may cause memory access  
problems.  
■ The memory module cover will be hot after using the computer for long  
periods of time. Use care when removing.  
The slot A is reserved for main memory. Use the slot B for expanded  
memory. If only one card is installed, use the slot A.  
10. Fit the memory module's connectors into the socket at about a 45  
degree angle and push the module down until latches on either side  
snap into place.  
Align the notch of the memory module with that of the memory slot and  
gently insert the module into the slot.  
Slot A  
Slot B  
Figure 8-12 Installing the memory module  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-13  
Optional Devices  
11. Replace the memory module cover and screw in the two screws.  
Screws  
Memory module  
cover  
Figure 8-13 Replace the memory module cover  
12. Insert the tabs on the front of the keyboard into the corresponding  
notches on the computer and place the keyboard down.  
When seating the keyboard, be sure to connect the circuit board if the  
keyboard ribbon cable was pulled out while you were removing the  
keyboard.  
13. Screw the two screws and secure the keyboard.  
Be sure to use all two screws removed in step 7. Make sure no screw was  
dropped into the computer. Make sure no foreign matter can be found.  
14. Set the keyboard brace into its groove and press down to secure the  
latches.  
15. Install the battery pack. Refer to Replacing the battery pack section in  
Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes, for details.  
16. Turn your computer over.  
17. Turn the power on and make sure the added memory is recognized.  
Click start, click Control Panel, click Performance and Maintenance  
and select the System icon. Open System Properties window and  
click General tab.  
Removing memory module  
To remove the memory module, make sure the computer is in boot mode  
then:  
1. Set the computer to boot mode and turn the computer’s power off.  
Make sure the Power indicator is off.  
2. Remove AC adaptor and all cables connected to the computer.  
3. Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack. Refer to  
Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up  
Modes, for details.  
4. Follow steps 4 through 9 in Installing memory module to remove the  
memory module cover.  
5. Push the latches to the outside to release the module. A spring will  
force one end of the module up.  
8-14  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Optional Devices  
6. Grasp the module by the sides and pull it out.  
■ If you use the computer for a long time, the memory modules and the  
circuits located close to the memory modules will become hot. In this  
case, let them cool to room temperature before you replace them.  
■ Do not touch the connectors on the memory module or on the  
computer. Debris on the connectors may cause memory access  
problems.  
Latches  
Figure 8-14 Removing the memory module  
7. Rotate the keyboard back into place and secure the keyboard brace as  
described in the previous section.  
8. Install the battery pack. Refer to Replacing the battery pack section in  
Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes, for details.  
9. Turn your computer over.  
Battery Pack  
You can increase the portability of the computer with additional battery  
packs. If you’re away from an AC power source and your battery runs low,  
you can replace it with a freshly charged battery. Refer to Chapter 6, Power  
and Power-Up Modes.  
Universal AC Adaptor  
If you frequently transport the computer between different sites such as  
your home and office, purchasing an AC adaptor for each location will  
reduce the weight and bulk of your carrying load.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-15  
Optional Devices  
Battery Charger  
The battery charger provides a convenient way to charge battery packs  
without requiring the use of your computer. The battery charger holds up to  
two battery packs (lithium ion).  
USB floppy disk drive (USB FDD Kit)  
The USB floppy disk drive module can be connected to the USB port. For  
details on connecting the USB floppy disk drive module, refer to Chapter 4,  
Operating Basics.  
External monitor  
An external analog monitor can be connected to the external monitor port  
on the computer. To connect a monitor, follow the steps below.  
1. Turn the computer’s power off.  
2. Connect the monitor cable to the external monitor port and tighten the  
screws on the left and right hand side.  
External monitor  
port  
Monitor cable  
Figure 8-15 Connecting the monitor cable to the external monitor port  
3. Turn the monitor’s power on.  
4. Turn the computer’s power on.  
When you turn on the power, the computer automatically recognizes the  
monitor and determines whether it is color or monochrome.  
However, the Windows Desktop appears on a display device that you used  
last time to shut down your computer, if the display device exists when you  
turn on the power.  
To change the display settings, press Fn + F5. If you disconnect the  
external monitor before you turn the computer’s power off, be sure to press  
Fn + F5 to switch to the internal display. Refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard,  
for details on using hot keys to change the display setting.  
8-16  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Optional Devices  
i.LINK (IEEE1394)  
i.LINK (IEEE1394) is used for high-speed data transfer for a range of  
compatible devices such as  
■ Digital video cameras  
■ Hard disk drives  
■ MO drives  
■ Writable optical disc drives  
i.LINK uses a four-pin connector, which does not carry any electric current.  
External devices will need their own power supply to operate.  
Precautions  
■ Make a back-up of your data before transferring it to the computer.  
There is a possibility that the original data will be damaged. There is a  
particular risk that some frames will be deleted in the case of digital  
video transfer. TOSHIBA assumes no liability for such loss of data.  
■ Do not transfer data in areas where static electricity is easily generated  
or in areas subjected to electronic noise. Data can be destroyed.  
■ If you are transferring data through an IEEE1394 hub, do not connect or  
disconnect other devices from the hub during data transfer. There is a  
likelihood that data will be damaged. Connect all devices to the hub  
before you turn on the computer’s power.  
■ You may not use any copyrighted video or music data copied from a  
video camera except for your personal enjoyment.  
■ If you connect/disconnect an i.LINK device to/from another i.LINK  
device that is currently exchanging data with the computer, data frames  
might be dropped.  
■ Make sure data transfer has ended or turn off the computer, before you:  
■ Connect/disconnect an i.LINK device to/from the computer.  
■ Connect/disconnect an i.LINK device to/from another i.LINK device  
that is connected to the computer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-17  
Optional Devices  
Connecting  
1. Make sure the connectors are properly aligned and plug the i.LINK  
(IEEE1394) cable into the computer.  
i.LINK (IEEE1394)  
port  
i.LINK (IEEE1394)  
connector  
Figure 8-16 Connecting the i.LINK (IEEE1394) cable into the computer  
2. Plug the other end of the cable into the device.  
Note the following when you use i.LINK:  
■ You may need to install drivers for your i.LINK devices.  
■ Not all i.LINK devices have been tested. Therefore, compatibility with all  
i.LINK devices cannot be guaranteed.  
■ Some devices might not support standby or automatic off functions.  
■ Do not connect or disconnect an i.LINK device while it is using an  
application or when the computer is automatically shutting it down to  
save power. Data might be destroyed.  
Disconnecting  
1. Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Task Bar.  
2. Point to i.LINK (IEEE1394) device and click.  
3. Disconnect the cable from the computer then from the i.LINK device.  
Refer also to the documentation that came with your i.LINK device.  
Bluetooth USB Adaptor  
A Bluetooth adaptor that has a USB connector. Wireless communications  
can be carried out with Bluetooth-compatible equipment by connecting to  
the USB port of the computer.  
You can buy the module from TOSHIBA dealer.  
8-18  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Optional Devices  
Wireless Optical Mouse with Bluetooth Technology  
The Wireless optical mouse with Bluetooth Technology is a wireless optical  
mouse compatible with Bluetooth.  
You can buy the Wireless optical mouse with Bluetooth Technology from  
TOSHIBA dealer.  
Wireless Stereo Headset with Bluetooth Technology  
The Wireless Stereo Headset with Bluetooth Technology is a wireless  
stereo headphone compatible with Bluetooth.  
You can buy the Wireless Stereo Headset with Bluetooth Technology from  
TOSHIBA dealer.  
Security lock  
Security locks enable you to anchor your computer a desk or other heavy  
object to help prevent unauthorized removal of the computer.  
Attach one end of a cable to a desk and the other end to the security lock  
slot.  
1. Turn the computer so the left side faces you.  
2. Align the holes for the security lock and attach the lock.  
Security lock slot  
Figure 8-17 Security lock  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-19  
Optional Devices  
8-20  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Satellite U200/PORTÉGÉ M500  
Chapter 9  
Troubleshooting  
TOSHIBA designed the computer for durability. However, should problems  
occur, following the procedures in this chapter can help to determine the  
cause.  
All readers should become familiar with this chapter. Knowing what might  
go wrong can help prevent problems from occurring.  
Problem solving process  
Resolving problems will be much easier if you observe the following  
guidelines:  
■ Stop immediately when you recognize a problem exists. Further action  
may result in data loss or damage. You may destroy valuable problem-  
related information that can help solve the problem.  
■ Observe what is happening. Write down what the system is doing and  
what actions you performed immediately before the problem occurred.  
If you have a printer attached, print a copy of the screen using PrtSc.  
The questions and procedures offered in this chapter are meant as a guide,  
they are not definitive problem solving techniques. Many problems can be  
solved simply, but a few may require help from your dealer. If you find you  
need to consult your dealer or others, be prepared to describe the problem  
in as much detail as possible.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-1  
Troubleshooting  
Preliminary checklist  
Consider the simplest solution first. The items in this checklist are easy to  
fix and yet can cause what appears to be a serious problem.  
■ Make sure you turn on all peripheral devices before you turn on the  
computer. This includes your printer and any other external device you  
are using.  
■ Before you attach an external device, turn the computer off. When you  
turn the computer back on it recognizes the new device.  
■ Make sure all options are set properly in the setup program.  
■ Check all cables. Are they correctly and firmly attached? Loose cables  
can cause signal errors.  
■ Inspect all connecting cables for loose wires and all connectors for  
loose pins.  
■ Check that your floppy disk or CD/DVD-ROM is correctly inserted and  
that the floppy disk’s write protect tab is correctly set.  
Make notes of your observations and keep them in a permanent error log.  
This will help you describe your problems to your dealer. If a problem  
recurs, the log will help you identify the problem faster.  
Analyzing the problem  
Sometimes the system gives clues that can help you identify why it is  
malfunctioning. Keep the following questions in mind:  
■ Which part of the system is not operating properly: keyboard, floppy  
disk drives, hard disk drive, optical disc drive, display. Each device  
produces different symptoms.  
■ Is the operating system configuration set properly? Check the  
configuration options.  
■ What appears on the display screen? Does it display any messages or  
random characters? If you have a printer attached, print a copy of the  
screen using PrtSc. Look up the messages in the software and  
operating system documentation. Check that all connecting cables are  
correctly and firmly attached. Loose cables can cause erroneous or  
intermittent signals.  
■ Do any indicators light? Which ones? What color are they? Do they stay  
on or blink? Write down what you see.  
■ Do you hear any beeps? How many? Are they long or short? Are they  
high pitched or low? Is the computer making any unusual noises? Write  
down what you hear.  
Record your observations so you can describe them to your dealer.  
9-2  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Software  
The problems may be caused by your software or disk. If  
you cannot load a software package, the media may be  
damaged or the program might be corrupted. Try loading  
another copy of the software.  
If an error message appears while you are using a software  
package, check the software documentation. These  
documents usually include a problem solving section or a  
summary of error messages.  
Next, check any error messages in the operating system  
documentation.  
Hardware  
If you cannot find a software problem, check your  
hardware. First run through the items in the preliminary  
checklist above. If you still cannot correct the problem, try  
to identify the source. The next section provides checklists  
for individual components and peripherals.  
Before using a peripheral device or application software that is not an  
authorized Toshiba part or product, make sure the device or software can  
be used with your PC. Use of incompatible devices may cause injury or  
may damage your PC.  
Hardware and system checklist  
This section discusses problems caused by your computer’s hardware or  
attached peripherals. Basic problems may occur in the following areas:  
■ System start-up  
■ Self test  
■ Power  
■ Password  
■ Keyboard  
■ xD picture card  
■ MultiMediaCard  
■ Pointing Device  
■ Fingerprint Sensor  
■ USB device  
■ Internal LCD display panel  
■ Hard disk drive  
■ DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive  
■ DVD Super Multi drive  
■ USB floppy disk drive  
■ SD card/SDIO card  
■ PC card  
■ Memory expansion  
■ Sound system  
■ External monitor  
■ i.LINK (IEEE1394) device  
■ Modem  
■ LAN  
■ Wireless LAN  
■ Memory Stick/Memory Stick Pro ■ Bluetooth  
System start-up  
When the computer does not start properly, check the following items:  
■ Self Test  
■ Power Sources  
■ Power-on Password  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-3  
Troubleshooting  
Self test  
When the computer starts up, the self test will be run automatically, and the  
following will be displayed:  
In Touch with Tomorrow  
TOSHIBA  
S
This message remains on the screen for a few seconds.  
If the self test is successful, the computer tries to load the operating  
system, depending on how the Boot Priority is set in the TOSHIBA HW  
Setup program.  
If any of the following conditions are present, the self test failed:  
■ The computer stops and does not proceed to display information or  
messages except the TOSHIBA logo.  
■ Random characters appear on the screen, and the system does not  
function normally.  
■ The screen displays an error message.  
Turn off the computer and check all cable connections. If the test fails  
again, contact your dealer.  
Power  
When the computer is not plugged into an AC outlet, the battery pack is the  
primary power source. However, your computer has a number of other  
power resources, including an intelligent power supply and a Real Time  
Clock battery. These resources are interrelated and any one could affect  
apparent power problems. This section provides checklists for AC power  
and the battery. If you cannot resolve a problem after following them, the  
cause could lie with another power resource. In such case, contact your  
dealer.  
Overheating power down  
If the computer’s internal temperature becomes too high, the computer will  
automatically enter Standby Mode or shut down.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Computer shuts down Leave the computer off until the computer has  
reached room temperature.  
It is recommended to leave the computer off until the interior reaches room  
temperature even though the DC IN indicator stops blinking.  
9-4  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
If the computer has reached room temperature  
and still does not start, or if it starts but shuts  
down quickly contact your dealer.  
Computer shuts down Indicates a problem with the heat dispersal  
and its DC IN indicator system. Please contact your dealer.  
is flashing blue  
AC power  
If you have trouble turning on the computer with the AC adaptor connected,  
check the DC IN indicator. Refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up  
Modes for more information.  
Problem  
Procedure  
AC adaptor doesn’t  
power the computer  
Check the connections. Make sure the cord is  
firmly connected to the computer and a power  
(DC IN indicator does outlet.  
not glow blue)  
Check the condition of the cord and terminals. If  
the cord is frayed or damaged, replace it. If the  
terminals are soiled, wipe them with cotton or a  
clean cloth.  
If the AC adaptor still does not power the  
computer, contact your dealer.  
Battery  
If you suspect a problem with the battery, check the DC IN indicator as well  
as the Battery indicator. For information on indicators and battery  
operation see Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Battery doesn’t power The battery may be discharged. Connect the AC  
the computer adaptor to charge the battery.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-5  
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Procedure  
Battery doesn’t charge If the battery is completely discharged, it will not  
when the AC adaptor  
is attached (Battery  
indicator does not  
glow orange.)  
begin charging immediately. Wait a few minutes.  
If the battery still does not charge, make sure the  
outlet of the AC adaptor is supplying power.  
Test it by plugging in an appliance.  
Check whether the battery is hot or cold to the  
touch. If the battery is too hot or too cold, it will  
not charge properly. Let it reach room  
temperature.  
Unplug the AC adaptor and remove the battery to  
make sure the terminals are clean. If necessary  
wipe them with a soft dry cloth dipped in alcohol.  
Connect the AC adaptor and replace the battery.  
Make sure it is securely seated.  
Check the Battery indicator. If it does not glow,  
let the computer charge the battery for at least 20  
minutes. If the Battery indicator glows after 20  
minutes, let the battery continue to charge at  
least another 20 minutes before turning on the  
computer.  
If the indicator still does not glow, the battery may  
be at the end of its operating life. Replace it.  
If you do not think the battery is at the end of its  
operating life, see your dealer.  
Battery doesn’t power If you frequently recharge a partially charged  
the computer as long  
as expected  
battery, the battery might not charge to its full  
potential. Fully discharge the battery, then try to  
charge it again.  
Check the power consumption settings in  
TOSHIBA Power Saver utility. Consider using a  
power saving mode.  
9-6  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Real Time Clock  
Problem  
Procedure  
The charge in the RTC battery has run out - you  
The following  
message is Displayed will need to set the date and time in the BIOS  
on the LCD screen:  
setup using the following steps:  
RTC battery is  
low or CMOS  
checksum is  
inconsistent.  
Press [F1] key to  
set Date/Time.  
1. Press F1 key. BIOS setup will boot up.  
2. Set the date in System Date.  
3. Set the time in System Time.  
4. Press End key. Confirmation message will  
appear.  
5. Press Y key. BIOS setup will terminate and  
the computer will be rebooted.  
Password  
Problem  
Procedure  
Cannot enter  
password  
Refer to the TOSHIBA Password Utility section in  
Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes.  
Keyboard  
Keyboard problems can be caused by your setup configuration. For more  
information refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Some letter keys  
produce numbers  
Check that the numeric keypad overlay is not  
selected. Press Fn + F11 and try typing again.  
Output to screen is  
garbled  
Make sure the software you are using is not  
remapping the keyboard. Remapping involves  
reassigning the meaning of each key. See your  
software’s documentation.  
If you are still unable to use the keyboard,  
consult your dealer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-7  
Troubleshooting  
Internal LCD display panel  
Apparent LCD problems may be related to the computer’s setup. Refer to  
Chapter 7, HW Setup, for more information.  
Problem  
Procedure  
No display  
Press hotkeys Fn + F5 to change the display  
priority, to make sure it is not set for an external  
monitor.  
Markings appear on the The marks may have come from contact with the  
LCD screen.  
keyboard or Touch Pad. Try wiping the LCD  
screen gently with a clean dry cloth. If markings  
remain, use a good quality LCD screen cleaner,  
taking care to ensure you let the LCD screen dry  
before closing it.  
Problems above  
remain unresolved or  
other problems occur  
Refer to your software’s documentation to  
determine if the software is causing the difficulty.  
Run the diagnostic test.  
Contact your dealer if the problems continue.  
Hard disk drive  
Problem  
Procedure  
Computer does not  
boot from hard disk  
drive  
Check if a floppy disk is in the floppy disk drive or  
a CD-ROM is in the optical disc drive. Remove  
any floppy disk and/or CD-ROM and check the  
Boot priority. Refer to the Boot Priority section in  
Chapter 7, HW Setup.  
There may be a problem with your operating  
system files. Refer to your operating system  
documentation.  
Slow performance  
Your files may be fragmented. Run Disk  
Defragmenter to check the condition of your files  
and disk. Refer to your operating system’s  
documentation or online HELP for information on  
running the Disk Defragmenter.  
As a last resort, reformat the hard disk. Then,  
reload the operating system and other files.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
9-8  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive  
For more information, refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Problem  
Procedure  
You cannot access a  
CD/DVD in the drive  
Make sure the drive’s disc tray is securely  
closed. Press gently until it clicks into place.  
Check whether the drive power is on. If the  
power is off, click on the optical disc drive icon in  
the task tray and turn on the power.  
Open the disc tray and make sure the CD/DVD is  
properly seated. It should lie flat with the label  
facing up.  
A foreign object in the disc tray could block laser  
light from reading the CD/DVD. Make sure there  
is no obstruction. Remove any foreign object.  
Check whether the CD/DVD is dirty. If it is, wipe it  
with a clean cloth dipped in water or a neutral  
cleaner. Refer to the Media care section in  
Chapter 4 for details on cleaning.  
Some CD/DVDs run  
The software or hardware configuration may be  
correctly, but others do causing a problem. Make sure the hardware  
not  
configuration matches your software’s needs.  
Check the CD/DVD’s documentation.  
Check the type of CD/DVD you are using. The  
drive supports:  
DVD-ROM:  
CD-ROM:  
DVD-ROM, DVD-Video  
CD-DA, CD-Text, Photo CDTM  
(single/multi-session), CD-  
ROM Mode 1, Mode 2, CD-  
ROM XA Mode 2 (Form1,  
Form2), Enhanced CD (CD-  
EXTRA), Addressing Method 2  
Recordable CD: CD-R, CD-RW  
Check the region code on the DVD. It must  
match that on the DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive.  
Region codes are listed in the Optical disc drives  
section in Chapter 2, The Grand Tour.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-9  
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Procedure  
Cannot write correctly If you have trouble writing, make sure you are  
observing the following precautions:  
■ Use only media recommended by TOSHIBA.  
■ Do not use the mouse or keyboard during  
writing.  
■ Use only the software supplied with the  
computer for recording.  
■ Do not run or start other software during  
writing.  
■ Do not jar the computer during writing.  
■ Do not connect/disconnect external devices  
or install/remove internal cards during writing.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
DVD Super Multi drive  
For more information, refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Problem  
Procedure  
You cannot access  
Make sure the drive’s disc tray is securely  
closed.  
Press gently until it clicks into place.  
a CD/DVD in the drive  
Check whether the drive power is on. If the  
power is off, click on the optical disc drive icon in  
the task tray and turn on the power.  
Open the disc tray and make sure the CD/DVD is  
properly seated. It should lie flat with the label  
facing up.  
A foreign object in the disc tray could block laser  
light from reading the CD/DVD. Make sure there  
is no obstruction. Remove any foreign object.  
Check whether the CD/DVD is dirty. If it is, wipe it  
with a clean cloth dipped in water or a neutral  
cleaner. Refer to the Media care section in  
Chapter 4 for details on cleaning.  
Some CD/DVDs run  
The software or hardware configuration may be  
correctly, but others do causing a problem. Make sure the hardware  
not  
configuration matches your software’s needs.  
Check the CD/DVD's documentation.  
9-10  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Check the type of CD/DVD you are using. The  
drive supports:  
DVD-ROM: DVD-ROM, DVD-Video  
CD-ROM:  
CD-DA, CD-Text, Photo CDTM  
(single/multi-session), CD-ROM  
Mode 1, Mode 2, CD-ROM XA  
Mode 2 (Form1, Form2), Enhanced  
CD (CD-EXTRA), Addressing  
Method 2  
Recordable DVD: DVD-R/-R DL, DVD+R/+R DL,  
DVD-RW, DVD+RW, DVD-  
RAM  
Check the region code on the DVD. It must  
match that on the DVD Super Multi drive. Region  
codes are listed in the Optical disc drives section  
in Chapter 2, The Grand Tour.  
USB floppy disk drive  
For more information, refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Problem Procedure  
Drive does not operate There may be a faulty cable connection. Check  
the connection to the computer and to the drive.  
Some programs run  
correctly but others do causing a problem. Make sure the hardware  
not configuration matches your software needs.  
The software or hardware configuration may be  
You cannot access the Try another floppy disk. If you can access the  
external 3 1/2" floppy  
disk drive  
floppy disk, the original floppy disk (not the drive)  
is probably causing the problem.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
SD card  
Refer also to Chapter 8, Optional Devices.  
Problem  
Procedure  
SD card error occurs  
Reseat the SD card to make sure it is firmly  
connected.  
Check the card’s documentation.  
You cannot write to an Make sure the card is not write protected.  
SD memory card  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-11  
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Procedure  
You cannot read a file Make sure the target file is on the SD memory  
card inserted in the slot.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
PC card  
Refer also to Chapter 8, Optional Devices.  
Problem  
Procedure  
PC card error occurs  
Reseat the PC card to make sure it is firmly  
connected.  
Make sure the connection between the external  
device and the card is firm.  
Check the card’s documentation.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
Memory Stick/Memory Stick Pro  
Refer also to Chapter 8, Optional Devices.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Memory Stick/Memory Reseat the Memory Stick/Memory Stick Pro to  
Stick Pro error occurs make sure it is firmly connected.  
Check the card’s documentation.  
You cannot write to an Make sure the Memory Stick/Memory Stick Pro is  
Memory Stick/Memory not write protected.  
Stick Pro  
You cannot read a file Make sure the target file is on the Memory Stick/  
Memory Stick Pro inserted in the slot.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
xD picture card  
Refer also to Chapter 8, Optional Devices.  
Problem  
Procedure  
xD picture card error  
occurs  
Reseat the xD picture card to make sure it is  
firmly connected.  
Check the card’s documentation.  
You cannot read a file Make sure the target file is on the xD picture card  
inserted in the slot.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
9-12  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
MultiMediaCard  
Refer also to Chapter 8, Optional Devices.  
Problem  
Procedure  
MultiMediaCard error  
occurs  
Reseat the MultiMediaCard to make sure it is  
firmly connected.  
Check the MultiMediaCard’s documentation.  
You cannot write to an Make sure the MultiMediaCard is not write  
MultiMediaCard protected.  
You cannot read a file Make sure the target file is on the  
MultiMediaCard inserted in the slot.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
Pointing Device  
If you are using a USB mouse, also refer to the USB device section in this  
chapter and to your mouse documentation.  
Touch Pad  
Problem  
Procedure  
On-screen pointer  
does not respond to  
Pad operation  
The system might be busy. If the pointer is  
shaped as an hourglass, wait for it to return to its  
normal shape and try again to move it.  
The mouse pointer  
moves too fast or too  
slow  
Try changing the speed setting in the mouse  
control utility.  
1. Click start, click Control Panel, click  
Printers and Other Hardware and select  
Mouse icon.  
2. Click the Pointer Options tab.  
3. Set the speed as required and click OK.  
Double-tapping does  
not work  
Try changing the double-click speed setting in  
the mouse control utility.  
1. Click start, click Control Panel, click  
Printers and Other Hardware and select  
Mouse icon.  
2. Click the Buttons tab.  
3. Set the double-click speed as required and  
click OK.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-13  
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Procedure  
The reaction of Touch Adjust the touch Sensitivity.  
pad is either too  
1. Click start and open the Control Panel.  
sensitive or not  
sensitive enough.  
2. Click the Printers and Other Hardware icon.  
3. Click the Mouse icon.  
4. Click the Advanced tab.  
5. Click the Advanced feature settings button.  
6. Click Touch Pad tab. Click the Settings  
button in the Pointer speed and tapping  
settings.  
7. Detailed Touch Pad setting is displayed.  
8. Move the slide of adjust the pointer speed in  
relation to the standard Windows setting.  
Click the OK button.  
9. Click the OK button on Advanced feature  
setting screen.  
USB mouse  
Problem  
Procedure  
On-screen pointer  
does not respond to  
mouse operation  
The system might be busy. If the pointer is  
shaped as an hourglass, wait for it to resume its  
normal shape and try again to move it.  
Make sure the mouse is properly connected to  
the USB port.  
Double-clicking does  
not work  
Try changing the double-click speed setting in  
the mouse control utility.  
1. Click start, click Control Panel, click  
Printers and Other Hardware and select  
Mouse icon.  
2. Click the Buttons tab.  
3. Set the double-click speed as required and  
click OK.  
The mouse pointer  
moves too fast or too  
slow  
Try changing the speed setting in the mouse  
control utility.  
1. Click start, click Control Panel, click  
Printers and Other Hardware and select  
Mouse icon.  
2. Click the Pointer Options tab.  
3. Set the speed as required and click OK.  
9-14  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Procedure  
The mouse pointer  
moves erratically  
The mouse might be dirty. Refer to your mouse  
documentation for instructions on cleaning.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
Fingerprint Sensor  
Problem  
Procedure  
Reading of the  
fingerprint was not  
successful.  
Please try again using the correct posture. Align  
your fingertip with the sensor as shown in the  
drawing and Swipe. Refer to Using the  
Fingerprint Sensor in Chapter 4, Operating  
Basics.  
Try the recognition process again using another  
enrolled finger.  
The fingerprint cannot Try the recognition process again using another  
be read due to injuries enrolled finger.  
to the finger.  
If fingerprints from all the enrolled fingers cannot  
be read, please logon by using the keyboard to  
input the password for the time being.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
USB device  
Refer also to your USB device’s documentation.  
Problem  
Procedure  
USB device does not  
work  
Check for a firm cable connection between the  
USB ports on the computer and the USB device.  
Make sure the USB device drivers are properly  
installed. Refer to your Windows XP  
documentation for information on checking the  
drivers.  
If you are using an operating system that does  
not support USB, you can still use a USB mouse  
and/or USB keyboard. If these devices do not  
work, make sure the USB KB/Mouse Legacy  
Emulation item in HW Setup is set to Enabled.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-15  
Troubleshooting  
Bios Beep Sounds  
Problem  
Procedure  
Beep sounds  
Beep volume can be set to High/Medium/Low/Off  
using the Bios Setup Program. The Default is  
Medium.  
The volume for the loud beep sound that occurs  
when there is a memory error cannot be adjusted.  
Memory expansion  
Refer also to Chapter 8, Optional Devices, for information on installing  
memory modules.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Beep sounds.  
Make sure the memory module installed in the  
memory slot is compatible with the computer.  
(Two beeps, a dash  
and a dot, for a  
defective memory  
module in slot A.  
If an incompatible module has been installed,  
follow the steps below.  
1. Turn off the computer.  
Three beeps, a dash  
and two dots for slot B.  
2. Disconnect the AC adaptor and all peripheral  
devices.  
When both beeps  
sound, both memories  
in slot A and B are  
defective.)  
3. Remove the battery pack.  
4. Remove the memory module.  
5. Install the battery and/or connect the AC  
adaptor.  
6. Turn on the power.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
The Intel® 940GML model cannot boot if a  
memory module of over 2GB is installed. Verify  
that the installed memory does not exceed 2GB.  
Error beep sounds  
(Five beeps, a dash  
and four dots).  
Sound system  
Refer also to documentation for your audio devices.  
Problem  
Procedure  
No sound is heard  
Adjust the volume control dial.  
Check the software volume settings.  
Make sure the headphone connection is secure.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
9-16  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Procedure  
Check Windows Device Manager. Make sure the  
sound function is enabled and that settings for I/  
O address, Interrupt level and DMA are correct  
for your software and do not conflict with other  
hardware devices that you may have connected  
to the computer.  
Annoying sound  
is heard  
You may be experiencing feedback. Refer to  
Sound system in Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
External monitor  
Refer also to Chapter 8, Optional Devices, and to your monitor’s  
documentation.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Monitor does not turn Make sure that the external monitor’s power  
on  
switch is on. Confirm that the external monitor’s  
power cable is plugged into a working power  
outlet.  
No display  
Try adjusting the contrast and brightness controls  
on the external monitor.  
Press hot keys Fn + F5 to change the display  
priority and make sure it is not set for the internal  
LCD.  
Display error occurs  
Check that the cable connecting the external  
monitor to the computer is attached firmly.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
i.LINK (IEEE1394) device  
Problem  
Procedure  
i.LINK device does not Make sure the cable is securely connected to the  
function  
computer and to the device.  
Make sure the device’s power is turned on.  
Reinstall the drivers. Open the Windows  
Control Panel and double-click the Add  
Hardware icon. Follow the on-screen  
directions.  
Restart Windows.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-17  
Troubleshooting  
Modem  
Refer to Appendix C, AT Commands and Appendix D, S-registers.  
Problem  
Communication  
Procedure  
Make sure the computer’s internal modem  
software can’t initialize settings are correct. Refer to Phone and Modem  
modem  
Properties in the Control Panel.  
You can hear a dial  
If the call is going through a PBX machine, make  
tone but can’t make a sure the communication application’s tone dial  
call  
detection feature is disabled.  
You can also use the ATX command. Refer to  
Appendix C, AT Commands.  
You place a call, but a Make sure the settings are correct in your  
connection can’t be  
made  
communications application.  
After making a call you Make sure the tone or pulse selection in your  
can’t hear a ring  
communications application is set correctly.  
You can also use the ATD command. Refer to  
Appendix C, AT Commands.  
Communication is cut The computer will automatically cut off  
off unexpectedly  
communication when connection with the carrier  
is not successful for a set time interval. Try  
lengthening this time interval.  
A CONNECTdisplay is Check the error control setting in your  
quickly replaced by NO communications application.  
CARRIER  
You can also use the AT\N command. Refer to  
Appendix C, AT Commands.  
Character display  
becomes garbled  
during a  
In data transmission, make sure the parity bit and  
stop bit settings correspond with those of the  
remote computer.  
communication  
session  
Check the flow control and communication  
protocol.  
You cannot receive an Check the rings before auto answer setting in  
incoming call  
your communications application.  
You can also use the ATS0 command. Refer to  
Appendix D, S-registers.  
If problems persist, contact your dealer.  
9-18  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
LAN  
Problem  
Procedure  
Cannot access LAN  
Check for a firm cable connection between the  
LAN jack and the LAN hub.  
Wake-up on LAN does Make sure the AC adaptor is connected. The  
not work  
Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even  
when the system is off.  
If problems persist, consult your LAN  
administrator.  
Wireless LAN  
If the following procedures do not restore LAN access, consult your LAN  
administrator. For more information on wireless communication, refer to  
Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Cannot access  
Wireless LAN  
Make sure the computer’s wireless  
communication switch is set to on.  
If problems persist, contact your LAN  
administrator.  
Bluetooth  
For more information on Bluetooth wireless communication, refer to  
Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Cannot access  
Bluetooth device  
Make sure the computer’s wireless  
communication switch is set to on.  
Make sure the Bluetooth Manager is running and  
the power to the Bluetooth device is turned on.  
Make sure no optional Bluetooth PC card and  
Bluetooth SD card are installed in the computer.  
The built-in Bluetooth function and an optional  
Bluetooth PC card or SD card cannot operate  
simultaneously. If problems persist, contact your  
dealer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-19  
Troubleshooting  
Disposing of PC and PC batteries  
■ Discard this PC in accordance with ordinances or rules of local  
regulations. For further information, contact your local government.  
■ This PC contains rechargeable batteries. After repeated use, the  
batteries will finally lose their ability to hold a charge and you will need  
to replace them. Under certain applicable laws and regulation, it may be  
illegal to dispose of old batteries by placing them in the trash.  
■ Please be kind to our shared environment. Check with your local  
government authority for details regarding where to recycle old  
batteries or how to dispose of them properly. This product contains  
mercury. Disposal of this material may be regulated due to  
environmental considerations. For disposal, reuse or recycling  
information, please contact your local government.  
■ If your hard disk or other storage media contains sensitive data, you  
should be aware that standard deletion procedures do not remove data  
from the media. These standard deletion procedures include:  
■ Selecting Delete for a target file  
■ Putting files in the Recycle Bin and emptying the Recycle Bin  
■ Reformatting the media  
■ Reinstalling an operating system from the recovery CD-ROM  
The procedures above delete only the initial part of the data used for file  
management. This makes the file invisible to the operating system, but  
the data can still be read by specialized utilities. If you dispose of the  
PC, please delete all the data on its hard disk drive. Doing so prevents  
unauthorized use of such data. To ensure your data is not used for  
unauthorized purposes, you can:  
■ Physically destroy the hard disk drive  
■ Use a proven specialized utility to overwrite all data  
■ Take the hard disk drive to a professional deletion service  
All data deletion costs will be borne by you.  
9-20  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
TOSHIBA support  
If you require any additional help using your computer or if you are having  
problems operating the computer, you may need to contact TOSHIBA for  
additional technical assistance.  
Before you call  
Some problems you experience may be related to software or the operating  
system, it is important to investigate other sources of assistance first.  
Before contacting TOSHIBA, try the following:  
■ Review troubleshooting sections in the documentation for software and  
peripheral devices.  
■ If a problem occurs when you are running software applications, consult  
the software documentation for troubleshooting suggestions. Call the  
software company’s technical support for assistance.  
■ Consult the dealer you purchased your computer and/or software from.  
They are your best sources for current information and support.  
Where to write  
If you are still unable to solve the problem and suspect that it is hardware  
related, write to TOSHIBA at the nearest location listed below:  
Outside of Europe  
In Europe  
Australia  
Germany & Austria  
TOSHIBA Australia Pty. Ltd.  
Information Systems Division  
84-92 Talavera Road  
North Ryde N.S.W. 2113  
Sydney  
TOSHIBA Europe (I.E.) GmbH  
Geschäftsbereich,  
Deutschland-Österreich  
Hammfelddamm 8,  
D-41460 Neuss, Germany  
Canada  
France  
TOSHIBA of Canada Ltd.  
191 McNabb Street,  
Markham, Ontario  
L3R 8H2  
TOSHIBA Systèms France S.A.  
7, Rue Ampère B.P. 131,  
92804 Puteaux Cedex  
China  
Netherlands  
TOSHIBA Personal Computer &  
Network (Shanghai) Co., Ltd.  
TOSHIBA Information Systems,  
Benelux B.V.  
43F, Hong Kong New World Tower, Rivium Boulevard  
No. 300 Huaihai Zhong Road,  
Shanghai, P. R. China 200021  
41 2909 LK Capelle a/d IJssel  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-21  
Troubleshooting  
Outside of Europe  
In Europe  
Spain  
Singapore  
TOSHIBA Singapore Pte. Ltd.  
438B Alexandra Road #06-01  
Alexandra Technopark  
Singapore 119968  
TOSHIBA Information Systems,  
ESPAÑA  
Parque Empresarial San Fernando  
a
Edificio Europa, l Planta,  
Escalera A 28830 Madrid  
United States of America  
United Kingdom  
TOSHIBA America Information  
Systems, Inc.  
TOSHIBA Information Systems  
(U.K.) Ltd.  
9740 Irvine Boulevard  
Irvine, California 92618  
USA  
TOSHIBA Court  
Weybridge Business Park  
Addlestone Road  
Weybridge, Surrey KT15 2UL  
The Rest of Europe  
TOSHIBA Europe (I.E.) GmbH  
Geschäftsbereich,  
Deutschland-Österreich  
Hammfelddamm 8,  
D-41460 Neuss, Germany  
9-22  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Satellite U200/PORTÉGÉ M500  
Chapter 10  
Legal Footnotes  
This chapter states the Legal Footnotes information applicable to TOSHIBA  
computers. In the text in this manual, *XX is used to show which Legal  
Footnotes description is related to TOSHIBA computers.  
Description(s) related to this computer are marked with a blue *XX in this  
manual. Clicking on *XX will display the related description.  
CPU*1  
Central Processing Unit (“CPU”) Performance Legal Footnotes.  
CPU performance in your computer product may vary from specifications  
under the following conditions:  
■ use of certain external peripheral products  
■ use of battery power instead of AC power  
■ use of certain multimedia, computer generated graphics or video  
applications  
■ use of standard telephone lines or low speed network connections  
■ use of complex modeling software, such as high end computer aided  
design applications  
■ use of several applications or functionalities simultaneously  
■ use of computer in areas with low air pressure (high altitude >1,000  
meters or >3,280 feet above sea level)  
■ use of computer at temperatures outside the range of 5°C to 30°C  
(41°F to 86°F) or >25°C (77°F) at high altitude (all temperature  
references are approximate and may vary depending on the specific  
computer model - please refer to your PC documentation or visit the  
Toshiba website at www.pcsupport.toshiba.com for details).  
User’s Manual  
10-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legal Footnotes  
CPU performance may also vary from specifications due to design  
configuration.  
Under some conditions, your computer product may automatically shut-  
down. This is a normal protective feature designed to reduce the risk of lost  
data or damage to the product when used outside recommended  
conditions. To avoid risk of lost data, always make back-up copies of data  
by periodically storing it on an external storage medium. For optimum  
performance, use your computer product only under recommended  
conditions. Read additional restrictions in your product documentation.  
Contact Toshiba technical service and support, refer to TOSHIBA support  
section in Chapter 9 Troubleshooting for more information.  
Memory (Main System)*2  
Part of the main system memory may be used by the graphics system for  
graphics performance and therefore reduce the amount of main system  
memory available for other computing activities. The amount of main  
system memory allocated to support graphics may vary depending on the  
graphics system, applications utilized, system memory size and other  
factors. For PC's configured with 4 GB of system memory, the full system  
memory space for computing activities will be considerably less and will  
vary by model and system configuration.  
Battery Life*3  
Battery life may vary considerably depending on product model,  
configuration, applications, power management settings and features  
utilized, as well as the natural performance variations produced by the  
design of individual components. Published battery life numbers are  
achieved on select models and configurations tested by Toshiba at the time  
of publication. Recharge time varies depending on usage. Battery may not  
charge while computer is consuming full power.  
After going through many charge and discharge cycles, the battery will lose  
its ability to perform at maximum capacity and will need to be replaced.  
This is a normal phenomenon for all batteries. To purchase a new battery  
pack, see the accessories information that is shipped with your computer.  
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity*4  
1 Gigabyte (GB) means 109 = 1,000,000,000 bytes using powers of 10. The  
computer operating system, however, reports storage capacity using  
powers of 2 for the definition of 1 GB = 230 = 1,073,741,824 bytes, and  
therefore shows less storage capacity. Available storage capacity will also  
be less if the product includes one or more pre-installed operating systems,  
such as Microsoft Windows and/or pre-installed software applications, or  
media content. Actual formatted capacity may vary.  
10-2  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legal Footnotes  
LCD*5  
Over a period of time, and depending on the usage of the computer, the  
brightness of the LCD screen will deteriorate. This is an intrinsic  
characteristic of LCD technology.  
Maximum brightness is only available when operating in AC power mode.  
The screen will dim when the computer is operated on battery power and  
you may not be able to increase the brightness of the screen.  
Graphics Processor Unit ("GPU")*6  
Graphics processor unit ("GPU") performance may vary depending on  
product model, design configuration, applications, power management  
settings and features utilized. GPU performance is only optimized when  
operating in AC power mode and may decrease considerably when  
operating in battery power mode.  
Wireless LAN*7  
The transmission speed over the wireless LAN and the distance over which  
wireless LAN can reach may vary depending on surrounding  
electromagnetic environment, obstacles, access point design and  
configuration, and client design and software/hardware configurations.  
[54Mbps is the theoretical maximum speed under the IEEE802.11 (a/b/g)  
standard.] The actual transmission speed will be lower than the theoretical  
maximum speed.  
Non-applicable Icons*8  
Certain notebook chassis are designed to accommodate all possible  
configurations for an entire product series. Therefore, please be aware that  
your selected model may not have all the features and specifications  
corresponding to all of the icons or switches shown on the notebook  
chassis.  
Copy Protection*9  
Copy protection technology included in certain media may prevent or limit  
recording or viewing of the media.  
Images*10  
All images are simulated for purposes of illustration.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-3  
Legal Footnotes  
Express Media Player  
The Express Media Player is not a Windows based application.  
Battery life will be less than when using similar applications in the Windows  
Operating System.  
10-4  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Satellite U200/PORTÉGÉ M500  
Appendix A  
Specifications  
This appendix summarizes the computer’s technical specifications.  
Physical Dimensions  
Refer to User’s Manual about Weight and Size.  
Environmental Requirements  
Conditions  
Ambient temperature  
Relative humidity  
Operating  
5°C (41°F) to 35°C (95°F)  
20% to 80%  
Non-operating  
Thermal Gradient  
-20°C (-4°F) to 65°C (149°F) 10% to 95%  
20°C per hour maximum  
Wet-bulb  
26°C maximum  
temperature  
Conditions  
Operating  
Altitude (from sea level)  
-60 to 3,000 meters  
Non-operating  
-60 to 10,000 meters  
maximum  
Power Requirements  
AC adaptor  
100-240 volts AC  
50 or 60 hertz (cycles per second)  
15 VDC  
Computer  
4.0 amperes  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-1  
Specifications  
Built-in Modem  
Network control unit (NCU)  
Type of NCU  
Type of line  
AA  
Telephone line (analog only)  
Type of dialing  
Pulse  
Tone  
Control command  
AT commands  
EIA-578 commands  
Monitor function  
Computer’s speaker  
Communication specifications  
Communication  
system  
Data:  
Fax:  
Full duplex  
Half duplex  
Communication  
protocol  
Data  
ITU-T-Rec  
V.21/V.22/V.22bis/V.32  
/V.32bis/V.34/V.90  
103/212A  
(Former CCITT)  
Bell  
Fax  
ITU-T-Rec  
(Former CCITT)  
V.17/V.29/V.27ter  
/V.21 ch2  
Communication  
speed  
Data transmission and reception  
300/1200/2400/4800/7200/9600/12000/14400/  
16800/19200/21600/24000/26400/28800/31200/  
33600 bps  
Data reception only with V.90  
28000/29333/30666/32000/33333/34666/36000/  
37333/38666/40000/41333/42666/44000/45333/  
46666/48000/49333/50666/52000/53333/54666/  
56000 bps  
Fax  
2400/4800/7200/9600/12000/14400 bps  
A-2  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Transmitting level  
Receiving level  
-10 dBm  
-10 to -40 dBm  
600 ohms ±30%  
Input/output  
impedance  
Error correcting  
Data compression  
Power supply  
MNP class 4 and ITU-T V.42  
MNP class 5 and ITU-T V.42bis  
+3.3V (supplied by computer)  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-3  
Specifications  
A-4  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Satellite U200/PORTÉGÉ M500  
Appendix B  
Display Controller and Modes  
Display controller  
The display controller interprets software commands into hardware  
commands that turn particular parts on the screen on or off.  
As indicated below, there are two types of video modes.  
■ Intel® 945GM model supports up to 2048 horizontal × 1536 vertical  
pixels.  
■ Intel® 940GML model supports up to 1920 horizontal × 1440 vertical  
pixels.  
Refer to the table on the next page which describes in detail supported  
video modes.  
Because of the LCD’s increased resolution, lines may appear broken in  
DOS mode.  
The display controller also controls the video mode, which uses industry  
standard rules to govern the screen resolution and the maximum number of  
colors that can be displayed on screen.  
Software written for a given video mode will run on any computer that  
supports the mode.  
Video modes  
The computer supports video modes defined in the tables below. If your  
application offers a selection of mode numbers that do not match the  
numbers on the table, select a mode based on mode type, resolution,  
character matrix, number of colors and refresh rates. Also, if your software  
supports both graphics and text modes, the screen display may appear to  
operate faster using a text mode.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-1  
Display Controller and Modes  
Table1 Video modes (VGA)  
Video mode  
Type  
Resolution  
Character  
matrix  
Colors  
Scanning  
frequency  
Vertical (Hz)  
(pels)  
0, 1  
2, 3  
VGA  
Text  
40 × 25  
8 × 8  
16 of 256K  
16 of 256K  
16 of 256K  
16 of 256K  
16 of 256K  
16 of 256K  
4 of 256K  
2 of 256K  
Mono  
70  
70  
70  
70  
70  
70  
70  
70  
70  
70  
Characters  
VGA  
Text  
80 × 25  
8 × 8  
Characters  
0*, 1*  
2*, 3*  
0+, 1+  
2+, 3+  
4, 5  
VGA  
Text  
40 × 25  
8 × 14  
8 × 14  
9 × 16  
9 × 16  
8 × 8  
Characters  
VGA  
Text  
80 × 25  
Characters  
VGA  
Text  
40 × 25  
Characters  
VGA  
Text  
80 × 25  
Characters  
VGA  
Grph  
320 × 200  
Pels  
6
VGA  
Grph  
640 × 200  
Pels  
8 × 8  
7
VGA  
Text  
80 × 25  
9 × 14  
9 × 16  
Characters  
7+  
VGA  
Text  
80 × 25  
Mono  
Characters  
B-2  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Controller and Modes  
Table1 Video modes (VGA) continued  
Video  
mode  
Type  
Resolution  
Character  
matrix  
Colors  
Scanning  
frequency  
Vertical (Hz)  
(pels)  
D
E
VGA  
Grph  
320 × 200  
Pels  
8 × 8  
16 of 256K  
16 of 256K  
Mono  
70  
70  
70  
70  
60  
60  
70  
VGA  
Grph  
640 × 200  
Pels  
8 × 8  
F
VGA  
Grph  
640 × 350  
Pels  
8 × 14  
8 × 14  
8 × 16  
8 × 16  
8 × 8  
10  
11  
12  
13  
VGA  
Grph  
640 × 350  
Pels  
16 of 256K  
2 of 256K  
16 of 256K  
256 of 256K  
VGA  
Grph  
640 × 480  
Pels  
VGA  
Grph  
640 × 480  
Pels  
VGA  
Grph  
320 × 200  
Pels  
User’s Manual  
B-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Controller and Modes  
Table 2 Video modes (Intel® 945GM model)  
■
■
Vertical Frequency can be set up when outputting to External Monitor.  
The screen may not be displayed properly in high resolution mode while  
running 3D applications, during DVD playback, etc. Reduce the resolution  
until the screen is displayed properly in such cases.  
Resolution  
LCD  
colors  
CRT  
colors  
Vertical  
frequency (Hz)*3  
640 × 480  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
60  
75  
85  
100  
800 × 600  
60  
75  
85  
100  
1024 × 768  
60  
75  
85  
100  
60  
75  
85  
1280 × 800  
100  
1280 × 1024  
(Virtual)*1  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
60  
75  
85  
100  
1600 × 1200  
(Virtual)*1  
60  
75  
85  
100  
1920 × 1440  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
60  
78  
85  
2
(Virtual)*1,  
*
2048 × 1536  
60  
75  
2
(Virtual)*1,  
*
*1 Only when displaying on LCD.  
*2 The 1920 × 1440 and 2048 × 1536 resolutions are only available in CRT  
and LCD/CRT display devices (When using an LCD monitor, the 1920 ×  
1440 and 2048 × 1536 resolutions cannot be selected).  
*3 The Vertical Frequency can change at CRT.  
The above table shows typical display modes.  
B-4  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Controller and Modes  
Table 2 Video modes (Intel® 945GM model) continued  
■ Vertical Frequency can be set up when outputting to External Monitor.  
■ The screen may not be displayed properly in high resolution mode while  
running 3D applications, during DVD playback, etc. Reduce the  
resolution until the screen is displayed properly in such cases.  
Resolution  
LCD  
colors  
CRT  
colors  
Vertical  
frequency (Hz)*3  
640 × 480  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
60  
75  
85  
100  
800 × 600  
60  
75  
85  
100  
1024 × 768  
60  
75  
85  
100  
60  
75  
1280 × 800  
85  
100  
1280 × 1024  
(Virtual)*1  
60  
75  
85  
100  
1600 × 1200  
(Virtual)*1  
60  
75  
85  
100  
1920 × 1440  
(Virtual)*1, *2  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
60  
75  
85  
2048 × 1536  
(Virtual)*1, *2  
60  
75  
*1 Only when displaying on LCD.  
*2 The 1920 × 1440 and 2048 × 1536 resolutions are only available in CRT  
and LCD/CRT display devices (When using an LCD monitor, the 1920 ×  
1440 and 2048 × 1536 resolutions cannot be selected).  
*3 The Vertical Frequency can change at CRT.  
The above table shows typical display modes.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-5  
Display Controller and Modes  
Table 2 Video modes (Intel® 945GM model) continued  
■ Vertical Frequency can be set up when outputting to External Monitor.  
■ The screen may not be displayed properly in high resolution mode while  
running 3D applications, during DVD playback, etc. Reduce the  
resolution until the screen is displayed properly in such cases.  
Resolution  
LCD  
colors  
CRT  
colors  
Vertical  
frequency (Hz)*3  
640 × 480  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
60  
75  
85  
100  
800 × 600  
1024 × 768  
1280 × 800  
60  
75  
85  
100  
60  
75  
85  
100  
60  
75  
85  
100  
1280 × 1024  
(Virtual)*1  
60  
75  
85  
100  
1600 × 1200  
(Virtual)*1  
60  
75  
85  
100  
1920 × 1440  
(Virtual)*1, *2  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
60  
75  
85  
2048 × 1536  
(Virtual)*1, *2  
60  
75  
*1 Only when displaying on LCD.  
*2 The 1920 × 1440 and 2048 × 1536 resolutions are only available in CRT  
and LCD/CRT display devices (When using an LCD monitor, the 1920 ×  
1440 and 2048 × 1536 resolutions cannot be selected).  
*3 The Vertical Frequency can change at CRT.  
The above table shows typical display modes.  
B-6  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Controller and Modes  
Table 3 Video modes (Intel® 940GML model)  
■
■
Vertical Frequency can be set up when outputting to External Monitor.  
The screen may not be displayed properly in high resolution mode while  
running 3D applications, during DVD playback, etc. Reduce the resolution  
until the screen is displayed properly in such cases.  
Resolution  
LCD  
colors  
CRT  
colors  
Vertical  
frequency (Hz)*3  
640 × 480  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
60  
75  
85  
100  
800 × 600  
60  
75  
85  
100  
1024 × 768  
60  
75  
85  
100  
60  
75  
1280 × 800  
85  
100  
1280 × 1024  
(Virtual)*1  
60  
75  
85  
100  
1600 × 1200  
(Virtual)*1  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
60  
75  
85  
1920 × 1440  
(Virtual)*1, *2  
60  
*1 Only when displaying on LCD.  
*2 The 1920 × 1440 resolution is only available in CRT and LCD/CRT  
display devices (When using an LCD monitor, the 1920 × 1440 resolution  
cannot be selected).  
*3 The Vertical Frequency can change at CRT.  
The above table shows typical display modes.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-7  
Display Controller and Modes  
Table 3 Video modes (Intel® 940GML model) continued  
■ Vertical Frequency can be set up when outputting to External Monitor.  
■ The screen may not be displayed properly in high resolution mode while  
running 3D applications, during DVD playback, etc. Reduce the  
resolution until the screen is displayed properly in such cases.  
Resolution  
LCD  
colors  
CRT  
colors  
Vertical  
frequency (Hz)*3  
640 × 480  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
60  
75  
85  
100  
800 × 600  
60  
75  
85  
100  
1024 × 768  
60  
75  
85  
100  
60  
75  
1280 × 800  
85  
100  
1280 × 1024  
(Virtual)*1  
60  
75  
85  
100  
1600 × 1200  
(Virtual)*1  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
64K/64K  
60  
75  
85  
1920 × 1440  
60  
2
(Virtual)*1,  
*
*1 Only when displaying on LCD.  
*2 The 1920 × 1440 resolution is only available in CRT and LCD/CRT  
display devices (When using an LCD monitor, the 1920 × 1440 resolution  
cannot be selected).  
*3 The Vertical Frequency can change at CRT.  
The above table shows typical display modes.  
B-8  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Controller and Modes  
Table 3 Video modes (Intel® 940GML model) continued  
■ Vertical Frequency can be set up when outputting to External Monitor.  
■ The screen may not be displayed properly in high resolution mode while  
running 3D applications, during DVD playback, etc. Reduce the  
resolution until the screen is displayed properly in such cases.  
Resolution  
LCD  
colors  
CRT  
colors  
Vertical  
frequency (Hz)*3  
640 × 480  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
60  
75  
85  
100  
800 × 600  
60  
75  
85  
100  
1024 × 768  
60  
75  
85  
100  
60  
75  
1280 × 800  
85  
100  
1280 × 1024  
(Virtual)*1  
60  
75  
85  
100  
1600 × 1200  
(Virtual)*1  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
16M/16M  
60  
75  
85  
1920 × 1440  
(Virtual)*1, *2  
60  
*1 Only when displaying on LCD.  
*2 The 1920 × 1440 resolution is only available in CRT and LCD/CRT  
display devices (When using an LCD monitor, the 1920 × 1440 resolution  
cannot be selected).  
*3 The Vertical Frequency can change at CRT.  
The above table shows typical display modes.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-9  
Display Controller and Modes  
B-10  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Satellite U200/PORTÉGÉ M500  
Appendix C  
AT Commands  
In most cases, you will not need to type AT commands manually. However,  
there might be some occasions when you will need to do so.  
This chapter describes AT commands for data mode. Fax and voice  
commands are taken care of by application software.  
The format for entering AT commands is:  
ATXn  
where X is the AT command, and n is the specific value for that command.  
After you type in the command press Enter.  
Any command issued is acknowledged with a response in either text or  
numeric values known as result codes.  
All commands and command-values accepted by the modem are  
described in this section; any entry other than those listed results in an  
error.  
+++ Escape sequence  
The escape sequence allows the modem to exit data mode and enter on-  
line command mode. While in on-line command mode, you can  
communicate directly to your modem using AT commands. Once you  
finish, you can return to data mode using the ATO command.  
A pause, the length of which is set by Escape Guard Time (S12), must be  
completed after an escape sequence is entered. This pause prevents the  
modem from interpreting the escape sequence as data.  
The value of the escape sequence character may be changed using  
register S2.  
A/  
A
Repeat last command  
This command repeats the last command string entered. Do not precede  
this command with an AT prefix or conclude it by pressing Enter.  
Answer command  
This command instructs the modem to go off-hook and answer an incoming  
call.  
User’s Manual  
C-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AT Commands  
Bn  
Communication standard setting  
This command determines the communication standard CCITT or Bell.  
B0  
B1  
Selects CCITT V.22 mode when the modem is at 1200 bps.  
Selects Bell 212A when the modem is at 1200 bps (default).  
B15 Selects V.21 when the modem is at 300 bps.  
B16 Selects Bell 103J when the modem is at 300 bps (default).  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1,15,16  
ERROROtherwise  
Dn  
Dial  
This command instructs the modem to dial a telephone number. Enter n  
(the telephone number and any modifiers) after the ATD command.  
Any digit or symbol (0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D) may be dialed as touch-tone  
digits. Characters such as spaces, hyphens, and parentheses do not count.  
They are ignored by the modem, but you may want to include them to make  
the number and modifiers easier to read.  
The following may be used as phone number modifiers:  
P
T
,
Pulse dialing.  
Touch-tone dialing (default).  
Pause during dialing. Pause for time specified in Register S8  
before processing the next character in the dial string.  
W
@
Wait for dial tone. Modem waits for a second dial tone before  
processing the dial string.  
Wait for quiet answer. Wait for five seconds of silence after  
dialing the number. If silence is not detected, the modem  
sends a NO ANSWER result code back to the caller.  
!
;
Hook flash. Causes the modem to go on-hook for 0.5  
seconds and then return to off-hook.  
Return to command mode. Causes the modem to return to  
command mode after dialing a number, without  
disconnecting the call.  
S=n Dial a telephone number previously stored using the &Zn=X  
command (See &Zn=X command for more information). The  
range is 0-3.  
En  
Echo command  
This command controls whether or not the characters entered from your  
computer keyboard are displayed on your monitor (echoed) while the  
modem is in command mode.  
E0  
E1  
Disables echo to the computer.  
Enables echo to the computer (default).  
C-2  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AT Commands  
Result Codes:  
OK n=0,1  
ERROROtherwise  
Hn Hook control  
This command instructs the modem to go on-hook to disconnect a call, or  
off-hook to make the phone line busy.  
H0  
H1  
Modem goes on-hook (default).  
Modem goes off-hook.  
Result Codes:  
OK n=0,1  
ERROROtherwise  
In  
Request ID information  
This command displays product information about the modem.  
I0  
I3  
I9  
Returns modem identity string and driver version number.  
Same as I0.  
Returns region ID in English.  
Result Codes:  
OK n=0,3,9  
ERROROtherwise  
Ln  
Monitor speaker volume  
This command sets speaker volume to low, medium, or high.  
L0  
L1  
L2  
L3  
Low volume.  
Low volume. (Same as L0)  
Medium volume (default).  
High volume.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1,2,3  
ERROROtherwise  
Mn Monitor speaker mode  
This command turns the speaker on or off.  
M0  
M1  
The speaker is off.  
The speaker is on until the modem detects the carrier signal  
(default).  
M2  
M3  
The speaker is always on when modem is off-hook.  
Speaker is on until the carrier is detected, except when  
dialing.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1,2,3  
ERROROtherwise  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-3  
AT Commands  
Nn  
Modulation handshake  
This command controls whether or not the local modem performs a  
negotiated handshake at connection time with the remote modem when the  
communication speed of the two modems is different.  
N0  
When originating or answering, this is for handshake only at  
the communication standard specified by S37 and the ATB  
command.  
N1  
When originating or answering, begin the handshake at the  
communication standard specified by S37 and the ATB  
command (default).  
During handshake, a lower transmission speed may be  
selected.  
Result Codes:  
OK n=0,1  
ERROROtherwise  
On  
Return on-line to data mode  
O0  
O1  
O3  
Instructs the modem to exit on-line command mode and  
return to data mode (see AT escape sequence, +++).  
This command issues a retrain before returning to on-line  
data mode.  
This command issues a rate renegotiation before returning to  
on-line data mode.  
Result Codes:  
OK n=0,1,3  
ERROROtherwise  
P
Select pulse dialing  
This command configures the modem for pulse (non touch-tone) dialing.  
Dialed digits are pulsed until a T command or dial modifier is received.  
Tone dial is the default setting.  
Qn  
Result code control  
Result codes are informational messages sent from the modem and  
displayed on your monitor. Basic result codes are OK, CONNECT, RING,  
NO CARRIER, and ERROR. The ATQ command allows the user to turn  
result codes on or off.  
Q0  
Enables modem to send result codes to the computer  
(default).  
Q1  
Disables modem from sending result codes to the computer.  
Result Codes:  
OK n=0,1  
ERROROtherwise  
C-4  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AT Commands  
T
Select tone dialing  
This command instructs the modem to send DTMF tones while dialing.  
Dialed digits are tone dialed until a P command or dial modifier is received.  
This is the default setting.  
Vn  
DCE response format  
This command controls whether result codes (including call progress and  
negotiation progress messages) are displayed as words or their numeric  
equivalents.  
V0  
V1  
Displays result codes as digits.  
Displays result codes as text (default).  
Result Codes:  
OK n=0,1  
ERROROtherwise  
Xn  
Result code selection, call progress monitoring  
This command selects which result codes will be used by the modem.  
Command Dial tone  
detect  
Busy  
signal  
Supported Result Code  
detect  
X0  
X1  
X2  
X3  
Disable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Disable  
OK, CONNECT, RING, NO CARRIER,  
ERROR  
Disable  
Disable  
Enable  
Enable  
OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR,  
CONNECT <RATE>  
OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR,  
NODIALTONE, CONNECT <RATE>  
OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR, BUSY,  
CONNECT <RATE>, BLACKLISTED  
X4 (default) Enable  
OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR,  
NODIALTONE, BUSY, CONNECT <RATE>,  
DELAYED, BLACKLISTED, REORDER,  
WARBLE, CALL WAITING DETECTED  
X5  
Enable  
Enable  
OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR,  
NODIALTONE, BUSY, CONNECT <RATE>,  
RRING, NO BONGTONE, DELAYED,  
BLACKLISTED, REORDER, WARBLE, CALL  
WAITING DETECTED  
User’s Manual  
C-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AT Commands  
Dial tone detect  
Disabled: The modem dials a call regardless of whether it detects a dial  
tone.  
Enabled: The modem dials only upon detection of a dial tone, and  
disconnects the call if the dial tone is not detected within 10  
seconds.  
Busy tone detect  
Disabled: The modem ignores any busy tones it receives.  
Enabled: The modem monitors for busy tones.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1,2,3,4,5  
ERROROtherwise  
Zn  
Recall stored profile  
The modem performs a soft reset and restores (recalls) the configuration  
profile according to the parameter supplied. If no parameter is specified,  
zero is assumed. Either Z0 or Z1 restores the profile.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1  
ERROROtherwise  
&Cn Data Carrier Detect (DCD) control  
Data Carrier Detect is a signal from the modem to the computer indicating  
that a carrier signal is being received from a remote modem. DCD normally  
turns off when the modem no longer detects the carrier signal.  
&C0 The state of the carrier from the remote modem is ignored.  
DCD circuit is always on.  
&C1 DCD turns on when the remote modem’s carrier signal is  
detected, and off when the carrier signal is not detected  
(default).  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1  
ERROROtherwise  
&Dn DTR control  
This command interprets how the modem responds to the state of the DTR  
signal and changes to the DTR signal.  
&D0 Ignore. The modem ignores the true status of DTR and treats  
it as always on. This should only be used if your  
communication software does not provide DTR to the  
modem  
&D1 If the DTR signal is not detected while in on-line data mode,  
the modem enters command mode, issues an OK result  
code, and remains connected.  
C-6  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AT Commands  
&D2 If the DTR signal is not detected while in on-line data mode,  
the modem disconnects (default).  
&D3 Reset on the on-to-off DTR transition.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1,2,3  
ERROROtherwise  
&F Load factory settings  
This command loads the configuration stored and programmed at the  
factory. This operation replaces all of the command options and the S-  
register settings in the active configuration with factory values.  
&F  
Recall factory setting as active configuration.  
&Gn V.22bis guard tone control  
This command determines which guard tone, if any, to transmit while  
transmitting in the high band (answer mode). This command is only used in  
V.22 and V.22bis mode. This option is not used in North America and is for  
international use only.  
&G0 Guard tone disabled (default).  
&G1 Sets guard tone to 550 Hz.  
&G2 Sets guard tone to 1800 Hz.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1,2  
ERROROtherwise  
&Kn Local flow control selection  
&K0 Disable flow control.  
&K3 Enable CTS/RTS flow control (default).  
&K4 Enable XON/XOFF flow control.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,3,4  
ERROROtherwise  
&Pn Select Pulse Dial Make/Break Ratio (WW)  
&P0 Selects 39% - 61% make/break ratio at 10 pulses per  
second.  
&P1 Selects 33% - 67% make/break ratio at 10 pulses per  
second.  
&P2 Selects 33% - 67% make/break ratio at 20 pulses per  
second.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1,2  
ERROROtherwise  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-7  
AT Commands  
&Tn Self-test commands  
These tests can help to isolate problems if you experience periodic data  
loss or random errors.  
&T0 Abort. Stops any test in progress.  
&T1 Local analog loop. This test verifies modem operation, as  
well as the connection between the modem and computer.  
Any data entered at the local DTE is modulated, then  
demodulated, and returned to the local DTE. To work  
properly, the modem must be off-line.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0  
CONNECT n=1  
ERROR  
Otherwise  
&V Display Current Configuration  
This command displays the current configuration of the modem. If  
nonvolatile memory is supported the stored profiles are displayed as well.  
&V  
View profiles.  
&W Store current configuration  
Saves the current (active) configuration (profile), including S-Registers.  
The current configuration comprises a list of storable parameters illustrated  
in the &V command. These settings are restored to the active configuration  
upon receiving a Zn command or at power up. Refer to the &V command.  
&W Stores the current configuration.  
&Zn=x Store telephone number  
This command is used to store up to four dialing strings in the modem’s  
nonvolatile memory for later dialing. The format for the command is  
&Zn=“stored number” where n is the location 0-3 to which the number  
should be written. The dial string may contain up to 34 characters. The  
ATDS=n command dials using the string stored in location n.  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0, 1, 2, 3  
ERROR Otherwise  
\Nn Error control mode selection  
This command determines the type of error control used by the modem  
when sending or receiving data.  
\N0  
\N1  
\N2  
Buffer mode. No error control.  
Direct mode.  
MNP or disconnect mode. The modem attempts to connect  
using MNP2-4 error control procedures. If this fails, the  
modem disconnects.  
This is also known as MNP reliable mode.  
C-8  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AT Commands  
\N3  
\N4  
V.42, MNP, or buffered (default).  
The modem attempts to connect in V.42 error control mode.  
If this fails, it attempts to connect in MNP mode. If this fails, it  
connects in buffer mode and continues operation. This is  
also known as V.42/MNP auto reliable mode (same as &Q5).  
V.42 or disconnect. The modem attempts to connect in V.42  
error control mode. If this fails, the modem disconnects.  
\N5  
\N7  
V.42. MNP or buffered (same as \N3).  
V.42. MNP or buffered (same as \N3).  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,1,2,3,4,5,7  
ERROROtherwise  
\Qn Local flow control selection  
\Q0  
\Q1  
\Q3  
Disable flow control.  
XON/XOFF software flow control.  
CTS/RTS to DTE (default).  
Result Codes:  
OK n=0,1,3  
ERROROtherwise  
\Vn Protocol result code  
\V0  
Disable protocol result code appended to DCE speed.  
\V1  
Enable protocol result code appended to DCE speed  
(default).  
Result Codes:  
OK n=0,1  
ERROROtherwise  
%B View numbers in blacklist  
If blacklisting is in effect, this command displays the numbers for which the  
last call attempted in the past two hours failed. The ERROR result code  
appears in regions that do not require blacklisting.  
%Cn  
Data compression control  
This command determines the operation of V.42bis and MNP class 5 data  
compression. On-line changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs  
first.  
%C0 V.42bis/MNP 5 disabled. No data compression.  
%C3 V.42bis/MNP 5 enabled. Data compression enabled  
(default).  
Result Codes:  
OK  
n=0,3  
ERROROtherwise  
User’s Manual  
C-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AT Commands  
C-10  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Satellite U200/PORTÉGÉ M500  
Appendix D  
S-registers  
S-registers contain the settings that determine how a number of functions  
of the internal modem operate. For example, how many times to let the  
telephone ring before the modem answers and how long to wait before it  
hangs up if a connection fails. You can also customize certain AT  
commands such as the escape sequence and command line termination.  
The contents of the registers are changed automatically when you modify  
corresponding settings in your communication software. If you choose,  
however, you can display and edit the contents of the registers manually  
when the modem is in command mode. If the value is out of the acceptable  
range, then an error is generated.  
This chapter describes the settings for each S-register.  
S-register values  
The format for displaying the value of an S-register is:  
ATSn?  
where n is the register number. After you type in the register press Enter.  
The format for modifying the value of an S-register is:  
ATSn=r  
where n is the register number, and r is the new register value. After you  
type in the register and its new value press Enter.  
Some registers vary from one country/region to another.  
S0  
Auto answer ring number  
This register determines the number of rings the modem will count  
before automatically answering a call. Enter 0 (zero) if you do not  
want the modem to automatically answer at all. When disabled,  
the modem can only answer with an ATA command.  
Range: 0-255  
Default: 0  
Units:  
rings  
User’s Manual  
D-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S-registers  
S1  
Ring counter  
This register is read only. The value of S1 is incremented with  
each ring. If no ring occurs over a six-second interval, this register  
is cleared.  
Range: 0-225  
Default: 0  
Units:  
rings  
S2  
AT escape character (user defined)  
This register determines the ASCII values used for an escape  
sequence. The default is the + character. The escape sequence  
allows the modem to exit data mode and enter command mode  
when on-line. Values greater than 127 disable the escape  
sequence.  
Range: 0-255, ASCII decimal  
Default: 43  
Units:  
ASCII  
S3  
S4  
Command line termination character (user defined)  
This register determines the ASCII values as the carriage return  
character. This character is used to end command lines and result  
codes.  
Range: 0-127, ASCII decimal  
Default: 13 (carriage return)  
Units:  
ASCII  
Response formatting character (user defined)  
This register determines the ASCII value used as the line feed  
character. The modem uses a line feed character in command  
mode when it responds to the computer.  
Range: 0-127, ASCII decimal  
Default: 10 (line feed)  
Units:  
ASCII  
D-2  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S-registers  
S5  
S6  
S7  
Command line editing character (user defined)  
This register sets the character recognized as a backspace and  
pertains to asynchronous only. The modem will not recognize the  
backspace character if it is set to a value that is greater than 32  
ASCII. This character can be used to edit a command line. When  
the echo command is enabled, the modem echoes back to the  
local DTE the backspace character, an ASCII space character,  
and a second backspace character. This means a total of three  
characters are transmitted each time the modem processes the  
backspace character.  
Range: 0-127, ASCII decimal  
Default: 8 (backspace)  
Units:  
ASCII  
Wait before dialing  
This register sets the length of time, in seconds, that the modem  
must wait (pause) after going off-hook before dialing the first digit  
of the telephone number. The modem always pauses for a  
minimum of two seconds, even if the value of S6 is less that two  
seconds. The wait for dial tone call progress feature (W dial  
modifier in the dial string) will override the value in register S6.  
This operation, however, may be affected by some ATX options  
according to country/region restrictions. In some countries/regions,  
S6 will set dial tone detect time.  
Range: 3-255  
Default: 3  
Units:  
seconds  
Connection completion time-out  
This register sets the time, in seconds, that the modem must wait  
before hanging up because carrier is not detected. The timer is  
started when the modem finishes dialing (originate), or goes off-  
hook (answer). In originate mode, the timer is reset upon detection  
of an answer tone if allowed by county restriction. The timer also  
specifies the wait for silence time for the @ dial modifier in  
seconds. S7 is not associated with the W dial modifier.  
Range: 1-255  
Default: 50  
Units:  
seconds  
User’s Manual  
D-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S-registers  
S8  
Comma pause time  
This register sets the time, in seconds, that the modem must  
pause when it encounters a comma (,) in the dial command string.  
In some countries/regions, S8 will set both wait before dialing and  
comma pause time.  
Range: 0-255  
Default: 2  
Units:  
seconds  
S11 DTMF dialing speed  
This register determines the dialing speed which is prefixed for  
each country/region.  
Range: 50-255  
Default: 95  
Units:  
.001 seconds  
S12 Escape guard time  
This register sets the value (in 20 millisecond increments) for the  
required pause after the escape sequence.  
Range: 0-255  
Default: 50  
Units:  
.02 seconds  
D-4  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S-registers  
S37 Dial line rate  
S37 = 0 (default)  
maximum modem speed  
reserved  
S37 = 1  
S37 = 2  
S37 = 3  
S37 = 4  
S37 = 5  
S37 = 6  
S37 = 7  
S37 = 8  
S37 = 9  
S37 = 10  
S37 = 11  
S37 = 12  
S37 = 13  
S37 = 14  
S37 = 15  
S37 = 16  
S37 = 17  
S37 = 18  
S37 = 19  
1200/75 bps  
300 bps  
reserved  
1200 bps  
2400 bps  
4800 bps  
7200 bps  
9600 bps  
12000 bps  
14400 bps  
16800 bps  
19200 bps  
21600 bps  
24000 bps  
26400 bps  
28800 bps  
31200 bps  
33600 bps  
User’s Manual  
D-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S-registers  
AT command set result codes  
The following table shows the result codes.  
The result code summary  
Result Code  
OK  
Numeric  
Description  
0
1
2
Command executed  
Modem connected to line  
CONNECT  
RING  
A ring signal has been  
detected  
NO CARRIER  
3
Modem lost carrier signal, or  
does not detect carrier  
signal, or does not detect  
answer tone  
ERROR  
4
Invalid command  
1
CONNECT 1200 EC*  
NO DIAL TONE  
BUSY  
5
Connection at 1200 bps  
No dial tone detected  
Busy signal detected  
6
7
NO ANSWER  
8
No quiet answer  
1
1
1
CONNECT 2400 EC*  
CONNECT 4800 EC*  
CONNECT 9600 EC*  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
24  
25  
86  
40  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
Connection at 2400 bps  
Connection at 4800 bps  
Connection at 9600 bps  
Connection at 14400 bps  
Connection at 19200 bps  
Connection at 7200 bps  
Connection at 12000 bps  
Connection at 16800 bps  
Connection at 300 bps  
Connection at 21600 bps  
Connection at 24000 bps  
Connection at 26400 bps  
Connection at 28800 bps  
Connection at 31200 bps  
1
1
CONNECT 14400 EC*  
CONNECT 19200 EC*  
1
CONNECT 7200 EC*  
1
1
CONNECT 12000 EC*  
CONNECT 16800 EC*  
1
CONNECT 300 EC*  
1
1
1
1
1
CONNECT 21600 EC*  
CONNECT 24000 EC*  
CONNECT 26400 EC*  
CONNECT 28800 EC*  
CONNECT 31200 EC*  
D-6  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S-registers  
1
CONNECT 33600 EC*  
60  
88  
Connection at 33600 bps  
2
DELAYED*  
Delay is in effect for the  
dialed number  
2
BLACKLISTED*  
89  
90  
Dialed number is blacklisted  
Blacklist is full  
2
BLACKLIST FULL*  
*1: EC only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option  
is enabled. EC is replaced by one of the following symbols, depending  
upon the error control method used:  
V.42bis - V.42 error control and V.42bis data compression.  
V.42 - V.42 error control only.  
MNP 5 - MNP class 4 error control and MNP class 5 data  
compression.  
MNP 4 - MNP class 4 error control only.  
NoEC - No error control protocol.  
*2: In some countries/regions, these result codes may not appear.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-7  
S-registers  
D-8  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Satellite U200/PORTÉGÉ M500  
Appendix E  
V.90  
The TOSHIBA internal modem uses V.90 technology. The modem is  
capable of downstream speeds of 56kbps (kilobits per second) when  
connected to an Internet service provider that supports V.90. As with any  
modem, the actual throughput (speed of data transfer) depends on analog  
telephone line conditions, which can vary considerably. Therefore, many  
users will experience throughput in the range of 28-50kbps under normal  
telephone line conditions. Upstream data flows at the V.34 rate.  
V.90 rates can be achieved only when one V.90-capable host modem is  
connected to another. The TOSHIBA Internal modem will select  
automatically V.34 if the remote modem lacks V.90 capability or if a  
combination of network and/or phone line conditions prevent V.90  
connection.  
V.90 mode  
Function  
Data V.90  
Transmission speed  
From 56kbps (maximum) to 28kbps  
(minimum)  
Reception only  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-1  
V.90  
Table E-1 Result codes for a V.90 connection  
No.  
70  
Result code  
Description  
CONNECT 32000 EC*  
CONNECT 36000 EC*  
CONNECT 40000 EC*  
CONNECT 44000 EC*  
CONNECT 48000 EC*  
CONNECT 52000 EC*  
CONNECT 56000 EC*  
CONNECT 28000 EC*  
CONNECT 29333 EC*  
CONNECT 30666 EC*  
CONNECT 33333 EC*  
CONNECT 34666 EC*  
CONNECT 37333 EC*  
CONNECT 38666 EC*  
CONNECT 41333 EC*  
CONNECT 42666 EC*  
CONNECT 45333 EC*  
CONNECT 46666 EC*  
CONNECT 49333 EC*  
CONNECT 50666 EC*  
CONNECT 53333 EC*  
CONNECT 54666 EC*  
Connection at 32000 bps  
Connection at 36000 bps  
Connection at 40000 bps  
Connection at 44000 bps  
Connection at 48000 bps  
Connection at 52000 bps  
Connection at 56000 bps  
Connection at 28000 bps  
Connection at 29333 bps  
Connection at 30666 bps  
Connection at 33333 bps  
Connection at 34666 bps  
Connection at 37333 bps  
Connection at 38666 bps  
Connection at 41333 bps  
Connection at 42666 bps  
Connection at 45333 bps  
Connection at 46666 bps  
Connection at 49333 bps  
Connection at 50666 bps  
Connection at 53333 bps  
Connection at 54666 bps  
72  
74  
76  
78  
80  
82  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
E-2  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
V.90  
*EC stands for the Error Control method, which appears only when the  
extended result codes configuration option is enabled. EC is replaced by  
one of the following symbols, depending on the error control method  
used.  
V42bis  
V42  
V.42 error control and V.42bis data compression  
V.42 error control only  
NoEC  
No error control protocol  
AT Command  
-V90=*  
V.90 Dial Line Rate  
-V90 sets the maximum V.90 downstream that the  
modem attempts to connect.  
-V90=0  
-V90=1  
V.90 disabled  
V.90 enabled: automatic speed selection -  
maximum modem speed (default)  
User’s Manual  
E-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
V.90  
E-4  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Satellite U200/PORTÉGÉ M500  
Appendix F  
Wireless LAN  
Card Specifications  
Form Factor  
Compatibility  
PCI-Ex MiniCard Type  
■ IEEE 802.11 Standard for Wireless LANS  
■ Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) certified by the Wi-Fi  
Alliance. The ‘Wi-Fi CERTIFIED’ logo is a  
certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.  
■ Microsoft Windows® Networking  
Network Operating  
System  
■ CSMA/CA (Collision Avoidance) with  
Media Access  
Protocol  
Acknowledgment (ACK)  
■ Theoretical maximum speed: 54Mbps (IEEE802.11a/  
Data Rate  
IEEE802.11g)  
■ Theoretical maximum speed: 11Mbps (IEEE802.11b)  
Radio Characteristics  
Radio Characteristics of Wireless LAN Cards may vary according to:  
■ Country/region where the product was purchased  
■ Type of product  
Wireless communication is often subject to local radio regulations.  
Although Wireless LAN wireless networking products have been designed  
for operation in the license-free 2.4GHz and 5GHz band, local radio  
regulations may impose a number of limitations to the use of wireless  
communication equipment.  
Refer to the sheet “Information to the User” for regulatory information that  
may apply in your country/region.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-1  
Wireless LAN  
■ Band 5GHz (5150-5850 MHz) (Revision A)  
R-F Frequency  
■ Band 2.4GHz (2400-2483.5 MHz) (Revision  
B, G)  
■ DSSS-CCK, DSSS-DQPSK, DSSS-DBPSK  
(Revision B)  
Modulation  
Technique  
■ OFDM-BPSK, OFDM-QPSK, OFDM-16QAM,  
OFDM-64QAM (Revision A, G)  
The range of the wireless signal is related to the transmit rate of the  
wireless communication. Communications at lower transmit range may  
travel larger distances.  
■ The range of your wireless devices can be affected when the antennas  
are placed near metal surfaces and solid high-density materials.  
■ Range is also impacted due to "obstacles" in the signal path of the radio  
that may either absorb or reflect the radio signal.  
Supported Frequency Sub-bands  
Subject to the radio regulations that apply in the countries/regions, your  
Wireless LAN card may support a different set of 5 GHz/2.4 GHz channels.  
Consult your Authorized Wireless LAN or TOSHIBA Sales office for  
information about the radio regulations that apply in the countries/regions.  
Wireless IEEE 802.11 Channels Sets (Revision B and G)  
Frequency Range  
2400-2483.5 MHz  
Channel ID  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2412  
2417  
2422  
2427  
2432  
2437  
2442  
2447  
2452  
F-2  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wireless LAN  
1
10  
11  
12  
13  
2457*  
2462  
2
2
2467*  
2472*  
*1 Factory-set default channels  
*2 Refer to the sheet Approved Countries/Regions for use for the countries/  
regions that in which these channels can be used. When installing Wireless  
LAN cards, the channel configuration is managed as follows:  
■ For wireless clients that operate in a Wireless LAN Infrastructure, the  
Wireless LAN card will automatically start operation at the channel  
identified by the Wireless LAN Access Point. When roaming between  
different access points the station can dynamically switch to another  
channel if required.  
■ For Wireless LAN cards installed in wireless clients that operating in a  
peer-to-peer mode, the card will use the default channel 10.  
■ In a Wireless LAN Access Point, the Wireless LAN card will use the  
factory-set default channel (printed in bold), unless the LAN  
Administrator selected a different channel when configuring the  
Wireless LAN Access Point device.  
Wireless IEEE 802.11 Channels Sets (Revision A)  
Frequency Range  
5150-5850 MHz  
Channel ID  
36  
40  
44  
48  
52  
56  
60  
64  
100  
104  
5180  
5200  
5220  
5240  
5260  
5280  
5300  
5320  
5500  
5520  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-3  
Wireless LAN  
108  
112  
116  
120  
124  
128  
132  
136  
140  
149  
153  
157  
161  
165  
5540  
5560  
5580  
5600  
5620  
5640  
5660  
5680  
5700  
5745  
5765  
5785  
5805  
5825  
F-4  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Satellite U200/PORTÉGÉ M500  
Appendix G  
AC Power Cord and Connectors  
The power cord’s AC input plug must be compatible with the various  
international AC power outlets and the cord must meet the standards for  
the country/region in which it is used. All cords must meet the following  
specifications:  
Length:  
Minimum 2 meters  
Minimum 0.75 mm  
2
Wire size:  
Current rating:  
Voltage rating:  
Minimum 2.5 amperes  
125 or 250 VAC  
(depending on country/region’s power standards)  
Certification agencies  
U.S. and Canada: UL listed and CSA certified  
No. 18 AWG, Type SVT or SPT-2  
Australia:  
AS  
Japan:  
DENANHO  
Europe:  
Austria:  
Belgium:  
Denmark:  
Finland:  
OVE  
Italy:  
IMQ  
CEBEC  
DEMKO  
FIMKO  
The Netherlands:  
Norway:  
KEMA  
NEMKO  
SEMKO  
Sweden:  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-1  
AC Power Cord and Connectors  
France:  
LCIE  
VDE  
Switzerland:  
SEV  
BSI  
Germany:  
United Kingdom:  
In Europe, two conductors power cord must be VDE type, H05VVH2-F or  
H03VVH2-F and for three conductors power cord must be VDE type,  
H05VV-F.  
For the United States and Canada, two pin plug configuration must be a 2-  
15P (250V) or 1-15P (125V) and three pin plug configuration must be 6-  
15P (250V) or 5-15P (125V) as designated in the U.S. National Electrical  
code handbook and the Canadian Electrical Code Part II.  
The following illustrations show the plug shapes for the U.S.A. and Canada,  
the United Kingdom, Australia and Europe.  
United Kingdom  
USA  
UL approved  
BS approved  
Australia  
Europe  
Approved by the  
AS approved  
appropriate agency  
Canada  
CSA approved  
G-2  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Satellite U200/PORTÉGÉ M500  
Appendix H  
TOSHIBA Anti-theft Protection  
Timer  
This function supports only the Windows XP Professional model.  
This function sets the limit for the number of days during which you are able  
to bypass authentication for the BIOS, Hard Disk Drive and Fingerprint.  
When the time limit is exceeded, you are required to provide the Password  
or fingerprint authentication for the BIOS and Hard Disk Drive to gain  
access to the system.  
To set permissions and limits for the TOSHIBA Anti-theft Protection Timer  
please use the TOSHIBA Password Utility.  
The settings can only be activated or modified by a user with supervisor  
authority. If the supervisor password is not set, click on the Set button in  
Supervisor Password from the supervisor tab in TOSHIBA Password  
Utility and set the password on the dialog screen that appears.  
Then, click on the Set button in TOSHIBA Anti-theft Protection Timer.  
Take the following action if the set limit is exceeded.  
■ If the Supervisor Password is registered but the User Password is not,  
enter the Supervisor Password to boot up the computer.  
■ If both the Supervisor Password and the User Password are registered,  
enter either the Supervisor Password, the User Password or the  
fingerprint authentication to boot up the computer.  
■ The limit counts the number of days from the last time Windows is  
logged on till the next time the computer is booted up. The range can  
be set from 1 to 28 days.  
■ Authentication is required if the computer’s clock is significantly  
modified.  
■ If the Supervisor Password is deleted, this function becomes disabled.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
H-1  
TOSHIBA Anti-theft Protection Timer  
H-2  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Satellite U200/PORTÉGÉ M500  
Glossary  
The terms in this glossary cover topics related to this manual.  
Alternate naming is included for reference.  
Abbreviations  
AC: alternating current  
AGP: accelerated graphics port  
ANSI: American National Standards Institute  
APM: advanced power manager  
ASCII: American Standard Code for Information Interchange  
BIOS: basic input output system  
CD-ROM: Compact Disc-Read Only Memory  
CD-RW: Compact Disc-ReWritable  
CMOS: complementary metal-oxide semiconductor  
CPU: central processing unit  
CRT: cathode ray tube  
DC: direct current  
DDC: display data channel  
DMA: direct memory access  
DOS: disk operating system  
DVD: digital versatile disc  
DVD-R: Digital Versatile Disc-Recordable  
DVD-RAM: Digital Versatile Disc-Random Access Memory  
DVD-ROM: Digital Versatile Disc-Read Only Memory  
DVD-RW: Digital Versatile Disc-ReWritable  
ECP: extended capabilities port  
FDD: floppy disk drive  
FIR: fast infrared  
HDD: hard disk drive  
IDE: integrated drive electronics  
I/O: input/output  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-1  
Glossary  
IrDA: Infrared Data Association  
IRQ: interrupt request  
KB: kilobyte  
LCD: liquid crystal display  
LED: light emitting diode  
LSI: large scale integration  
MB: megabyte  
MS-DOS: Microsoft Disk Operating System  
OCR: optical character recognition (reader)  
PCB: printed circuit board  
PCI: peripheral component interconnect  
RAM: random access memory  
RGB: red, green, and blue  
ROM: read only memory  
RTC: real time clock  
SCSI: small computer system interface  
SIO: serial input/output  
SXGA+: super extended graphics array plus  
TFT: thin-film transistor  
UART: universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter  
USB: Universal Serial Bus  
UXGA: ultra extended graphics array  
VESA: Video Electronic Standards Association  
VGA: video graphics array  
VRT: voltage reduction technology  
WXGA: wide extended graphics array  
XGA: extended graphics array  
A
AccuPoint: A pointing device integrated into the TOSHIBA computer  
keyboard.  
adaptor: A device that provides an interface between two dissimilar  
electronic devices. For example, the AC adaptor modifies the power  
from a wall outlet for use by the computer. This term also refers to  
the add-in circuit cards that control external devices, such as video  
monitors and magnetic tape devices.  
allocate: To assign a space or function for a specific task.  
alphanumeric: Keyboard characters including letters, numbers and other  
symbols, such as punctuation marks or mathematical symbols.  
alternating current (AC): Electric current that reverses its direction of flow  
at regular intervals.  
Glossary-2  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
analog signal: A signal whose characteristics such as amplitude and  
frequency vary in proportion to (are an analog of) the value to be  
transmitted. Voice communications are analog signals.  
ANSI: American National Standards Institute. An organization established  
to adopt and define standards for a variety of technical disciplines.  
For example, ANSI defined the ASCII standard and other  
information processing requirements.  
antistatic: A material used to prevent the buildup of static electricity.  
application: A group of programs that together are used for a specific task  
such as accounting, financial planning, spreadsheets, word  
processing and games.  
ASCII: American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ASCII code  
is a set of 256 binary codes that represent the most commonly used  
letters, numbers, and symbols.  
async: Short for asynchronous.  
asynchronous: Lacking regular time relationship. As applied to computer  
communications, asynchronous refers to the method of transmitting  
data that does not require a steady stream of bits to be transmitted  
at regular time intervals.  
B
backup: A duplicate copy of files kept as a spare in case the original is  
destroyed.  
batch file: A file that can be executed from the system prompt containing  
a sequence of operating system commands or executable files.  
binary: The base two number system composed of zeros and ones (off or  
on), used by most digital computers. The right-most digit of a binary  
number has a value of 1, the next a value of 2, then 4, 8, 16, and so  
on. For example, the binary number 101 has a value of 5. See also  
ASCII.  
BIOS: Basic Input Output System. The firmware that controls data flow  
within the computer. See also firmware.  
bit: Derived from "binary digit," the basic unit of information used by the  
computer. It is either zero or one. Eight bits is one byte. See also  
byte.  
board: A circuit board. An internal card containing electronic components,  
called chips, which perform a specific function or increase the  
capabilities of the system.  
boot: Short for bootstrap. A program that starts or restarts the computer.  
The program reads instructions from a storage device into the  
computer’s memory.  
bps: Bits per second. Typically used to describe the data transmission  
speed of a modem.  
buffer: The portion of the computer’s memory where data is temporarily  
stored. Buffers often compensate for differences in the rate of flow  
from one device to another.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-3  
Glossary  
bus: An interface for transmission of signals, data or electric power.  
byte: The representation of a single character. A sequence of eight bits  
treated as a single unit; also the smallest addressable unit within the  
system.  
C
cache memory: High speed memory which stores data that increases  
processor speed and data transfer rate. When the CPU reads data  
from main memory, it stores a copy of this data in cache memory.  
The next time the CPU needs that same data, it looks for it in the  
cache memory rather than the main memory, which saves time. The  
computer has two cache levels. Level one is incorporated into the  
processor and level two resides in external memory.  
capacity: The amount of data that can be stored on a magnetic storage  
device such as a floppy disk or hard disk. It is usually described in  
terms of kilobytes (KB), where one KB = 1024 bytes and megabytes  
(MB), where one MB = 1024 KB.  
card: Synonym for board. See board.  
CardBus: An industry standard bus for 32-bit PC cards.  
CD-ROM: A Compact Disc-Read Only Memory is a high capacity disc that  
can be read from but not written to. The CD-ROM drive uses a laser,  
rather than magnetic heads, to read data from the disc.  
CD-R: A Compact Disc-Recordable disc can be written once and read  
many times. See also CD-ROM.  
CD-RW: A Compact Disc-ReWritable disc can be rewritten many times.  
See also CD-ROM.  
character: Any letter, number, punctuation mark, or symbol used by the  
computer. Also synonymous with byte.  
chassis: The frame containing the computer.  
chip: A small semiconductor containing computer logic and circuitry for  
processing, memory, input/output functions and controlling other  
chips.  
CMOS: Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor. An electronic circuit  
fabricated on a silicon wafer that requires very little power.  
Integrated circuits implemented in CMOS technology can be tightly  
packaged and are highly reliable.  
cold start: Starting a computer that is currently off (turning on the power).  
COM1, COM2, COM3 and COM4: The names assigned to the serial and  
communication ports.  
commands: Instructions you enter at the terminal keyboard that direct the  
actions of the computer or its peripheral devices.  
communications: The means by which a computer transmits and  
receives data to and from another computer or device. See parallel  
interface; serial interface.  
Glossary-4  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
compatibility: 1) The ability of one computer to accept and process data  
in the same manner as another computer without modifying the data  
or the media upon which it is being transferred.  
2) the ability of one device to connect to or communicate with  
another system or component.  
components: Elements or parts (of a system) which make up the whole  
(system).  
computer program: A set of instructions written for a computer that  
enable it to achieve a desired result.  
computer system: A combination of hardware, software, firmware, and  
peripheral components assembled to process data into useful  
information.  
configuration: The specific components in your system (such as the  
terminal, printer, and disk drives) and the settings that define how  
your system works. You use the HW Setup program to control your  
system configuration.  
control keys: A key or sequence of keys you enter from the keyboard to  
initiate a particular function within a program.  
controller: Built-in hardware and software that controls the functions of a  
specific internal or peripheral device (e.g. keyboard controller).  
co-processor: A circuit built into the processor that is dedicated to  
intensive math calculations.  
CPS: Characters Per Second. Typically used to indicate the transmission  
speed of a printer.  
CPU: Central Processing Unit. The portion of the computer that interprets  
and executes instructions.  
CRT: Cathode Ray Tube. A vacuum tube in which beams projected on a  
fluorescent screen-producing luminous spots. An example is the  
television set.  
cursor: A small, blinking rectangle or line that indicates the current  
position on the display screen.  
D
data: Information that is factual, measurable or statistical that a computer  
can process, store, or retrieve.  
data bits: A data communications parameter controlling the number of bits  
(binary digits) used to make up a byte. If data bits = 7 the computer  
can generate 128 unique characters. If data bits = 8 the computer  
can generate 256 unique characters.  
DC: Direct Current. Electric current that flows in one direction. This type of  
power is usually supplied by batteries.  
default: The parameter value automatically selected by the system when  
you or the program do not provide instructions. Also called a preset  
value.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-5  
Glossary  
delete: To remove data from a disk or other data storage device.  
Synonymous with erase.  
device driver: A program that controls communication between a specific  
peripheral device and the computer. The CONFIG.SYS file contains  
device drivers that MS-DOS loads when you turn the computer on.  
dialog box: A window that accepts user input to make system settings or  
record other information.  
disk drive: The device that randomly accesses information on a disk and  
copies it to the computer’s memory. It also writes data from memory  
to the disk. To accomplish these tasks, the unit physically rotates  
the disk at high speed past a read-write head.  
disk storage: Storing data on magnetic disk. Data is arranged on  
concentric tracks much like a phonograph record.  
display: A CRT, LCD, or other image producing device used to view  
computer output.  
documentation: The set of manuals and/or other instructions written for  
the users of a computer system or application. Computer system  
documentation typically includes procedural and tutorial information  
as well as system functions.  
DOS: Disk Operating System. See operating system.  
driver: A software program, generally part of the operating system, that  
controls a specific piece of hardware (frequently a peripheral device  
such as a printer or mouse).  
Dual Pointing Device: Pointing device consisting of AccuPoint and Touch  
Pad. Both of these device can function together or separately. See  
AccuPoint and Touch Pad.  
DVD-R (+R, -R): A Digital Versatile Disc-Recordable disk can be written  
once and read many times. The DVD-R drive uses a laser to read  
data from the disc.  
DVD-RAM: A Digital Versatile Disc-Random Access Memory is a high-  
capacity, high performance disc that lets you store large volumes of  
data. The DVD-ROM drive uses a laser to read data from the disc.  
DVD-ROM: A Digital Versatile Disc-Read Only Memory is a high capacity,  
high performance disc suitable for play back of video and other  
high-density files. The DVD-ROM drive uses a laser to read data  
from the disc.  
DVD-RW (+RW, -RW): A Digital Versatile Disc-ReWritable disc can be  
rewritten many times.  
E
echo: To send back a reflection of the transmitted data to the sending  
device. You can display the information on the screen, or output it to  
the printer, or both. When a computer receives back data it  
transmitted to a CRT (or other peripheral device) and then  
retransmits the data to printer, the printer is said to echo the CRT.  
erase: See delete.  
Glossary-6  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
escape: 1) A code (ASCII code 27), signaling the computer that what  
follows are commands; used with peripheral devices such as  
printers and modems.  
2) A means of aborting the task currently in progress.  
escape guard time: A time before and after an escape code is sent to the  
modem which distinguishes between escapes that are part of the  
transmitted data, and escapes that are intended as a command to  
the modem.  
execute: To interpret and execute an instruction.  
Extended Capability Port: An industry standard that provides a data  
buffer, switchable forward and reverse data transmission, and run  
length encoding (RLE) support.  
F
fast infrared: An industry standard that enables cableless infrared serial  
data transfer at speeds of up to 4 Mbps.  
file: A collection of related information; a file can contain data, programs,  
or both.  
fingerprint sensor: The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes the  
unique characteristics in a fingerprint.  
firmware: A set of instructions built into the hardware which controls and  
directs a microprocessor’s activities.  
floppy disk: A removable disk that stores magnetically encoded data.  
floppy disk drive (FDD): An electromechanical device that reads and  
writes to floppy disks.  
Fn-esse: A TOSHIBA utility that lets you assign functions to hot keys.  
folder: An icon in Windows used to store documents or other folders.  
format: The process of readying a blank disk for its first use. Formatting  
establishes the structure of the disk that the operating system  
expects before it writes files or programs onto the disk.  
function keys: The keys labeled F1 through F12 that tell the computer to  
perform certain functions.  
G
gigabyte (GB): A unit of data storage equal to 1024 megabytes. See also  
megabyte.  
graphics: Drawings, pictures, or other images, such as charts or graphs,  
to present information.  
H
hard disk: A non-removable disk usually referred to as drive C. The  
factory installs this disk and only a trained engineer can remove it  
for servicing. Also called fixed disk.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-7  
Glossary  
hard disk drive (HDD): An electromechanical device that reads and writes  
a hard disk. See also hard disk.  
hardware: The physical electronic and mechanical components of a  
computer system: typically, the computer itself, external disk drives,  
etc. See also software and firmware.  
hertz: A unit of wave frequency that equals one cycle per second.  
hexadecimal: The base 16 numbering system composed of the digits 0  
through 9 and the letters A, B, C, D, E, and F.  
host computer: The computer that controls, regulates, and transmits  
information to a device or another computer.  
hot key: The computer’s feature in which certain keys in combination with  
the extended function key, Fn, can be used to set system  
parameters, such as speaker volume.  
HW Setup: A TOSHIBA utility that lets you set the parameters for various  
hardware components.  
I
icon: A small graphic image displayed on the screen or in the indicator  
panel. In Windows, an icon represents an object that the user can  
manipulate.  
i.LINK (IEEE1394): This port enables high-speed data transfer directly  
from external devices such as digital video cameras.  
infrared port: A cableless communications port capable of using infrared  
signals to send serial data.  
input: The data or instructions you provide to a computer, communication  
device or other peripheral device from the keyboard or external or  
internal storage devices. The data sent (or output) by the sending  
computer is input for the receiving computer.  
instruction: Statements or commands that specify how to perform a  
particular task.  
interface: 1) Hardware and/or software components of a system used  
specifically to connect one system or device to another.  
2) To physically connect one system or device to another to  
exchange information.  
3) The point of contact between user, the computer, and the  
program, for example, the keyboard or a menu.  
interrupt request: A signal that gives a component access to the  
processor.  
I/O: Input/output. Refers to acceptance and transfer of data to and from a  
computer.  
I/O devices: Equipment used to communicate with the computer and  
transfer data to and from it.  
IrDA 1.1: An industry standard that enables cableless infrared serial data  
transfer at speeds of up to 4 Mbps.  
Glossary-8  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
J
jumper: A small clip or wire that allows you to change the hardware  
characteristics by electrically connecting two points of a circuit.  
K
K: Taken from the Greek word kilo, meaning 1000; often used as  
equivalent to 1024, or 2 raised to the 10th power. See also byte and  
kilobyte.  
KB: See kilobyte.  
keyboard: An input device containing switches that are activated by  
manually pressing marked keys. Each keystroke activates a switch  
that transmits a specific code to the computer. For each key, the  
transmitted code is, in turn, representative of the (ASCII) character  
marked on the key.  
kilobyte (KB): A unit of data storage equal to 1024 bytes. See also byte  
and megabyte.  
L
level 2 cache: See cache.  
Light Emitting Diode (LED): A semiconductor device that emits light  
when a current is applied.  
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD): Liquid crystal sealed between two sheets  
of glass coated with transparent conducting material. The viewing-  
side coating is etched into character forming segments with leads  
that extend to the edge of the glass. Applying a voltage between the  
glass sheets alters the brightness of the liquid crystal.  
LSI: Large Scale Integration.  
1) A technology that allows the inclusion of up to 100,000 simple  
logic gates on a single chip.  
2) An integrated circuit that uses large scale integration.  
M
main board: See motherboard.  
megabyte (MB): A unit of data storage equal to 1024 kilobytes. See also  
kilobyte.  
megahertz: A unit of wave frequency that equals 1 million cycles per  
second. See also hertz.  
menu: A software interface that displays a list of options on the screen.  
Also called a screen.  
microprocessor: A hardware component contained in a single integrated  
circuit that carries out instructions. Also called the central  
processing unit (CPU), one of the main parts of the computer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-9  
Glossary  
mode: A method of operation, for example, the boot mode, Standby Mode  
or the Hibernation Mode.  
modem: Derived from modulator/demodulator, a device that converts  
(modulates) digital data for transmission over telephone lines and  
then converts modulated data (demodulates) to digital format where  
received.  
monitor: A device that uses rows and columns of pixels to display  
alphanumeric characters or graphic images. See also CRT.  
motherboard: A name sometimes used to refer to the main printed circuit  
board in processing equipment. It usually contains integrated  
circuits that perform the processor’s basic functions and provides  
connectors for adding other boards that perform special functions.  
Sometimes called a main board.  
MP3: An audio compression standard that enables high-quality  
transmission and real-time playback of sound files.  
N
non-system disk: A formatted floppy disk you can use to store programs  
and data but you cannot use to start the computer. See system disk.  
nonvolatile memory: Memory, usually read-only (ROM), that is capable  
of permanently storing information. Turning the computer’s power  
off does not alter data stored in nonvolatile memory.  
numeric keypad overlay: A feature that allows you to use certain keys on  
the keyboard to perform numeric entry, or to control cursor and  
page movement.  
O
OCR: Optical Character Recognition (reader). A technique or device that  
uses laser or visible light to identify characters and input them into a  
storage device.  
online state: A functional state of a peripheral device when it is ready to  
receive or transmit data.  
operating system: A group of programs that controls the basic operation  
of a computer. Operating system functions include interpreting  
programs, creating data files, and controlling the transmission and  
receipt (input/output) of data to and from memory and peripheral  
devices.  
output: The results of a computer operation. Output commonly indicates  
data.  
1) printed on paper, 2) displayed at a terminal, 3) sent through the  
serial port of internal modem, or 4) stored on some magnetic media.  
Glossary-10  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
P
parallel interface: Refers to a type of information exchange that transmits  
information one byte (8 bits) at a time. See also serial interface.  
parity: 1) The symmetrical relationship between two parameter values  
(integers) both of which are either on or off; odd or even; 0 or 1.  
2) In serial communications, an error detection bit that is added to a  
group of data bits making the sum of the bits even or odd. Parity can  
be set to none, odd, or even.  
password: A unique string of characters used to identify a specific user.  
The computer provides various levels of password protection such  
as user, supervisor and eject.  
pel: The smallest area of the display that can be addressed by software.  
Equal in size to a pixel or group of pixels. See pixel.  
peripheral component interconnect: An industry standard 32-bit bus.  
peripheral device: An I/O device that is external to the central processor  
and/or main memory such as a printer or a mouse.  
pixel: A picture element. The smallest dot that can be made on a display  
or printer. Also called a pel.  
plug and play: A capability with Windows that enables the system to  
automatically recognize connections of external devices and make  
the necessary configurations in the computer.  
port: The electrical connection through which the computer sends and  
receives data to and from devices or other computers.  
Power Saver Utility: A TOSHIBA utility that lets you set the parameters  
for various power-saving functions.  
printed circuit board (PCB): A hardware component of a processor to  
which integrated circuits and other components are attached. The  
board itself is typically flat and rectangular, and constructed of  
fiberglass, to form the attachment surface.  
program: A set of instructions a computer can execute that enables it to  
achieve a desired result. See also application.  
prompt: A message the computer provides indicating it is ready for or  
requires information or an action from you.  
R
Radio frequency interference (RFI) shield: A metal shield enclosing the  
printed circuit boards of the printer or computer to prevent radio and  
TV interference. All computer equipment generates radio frequency  
signals. The FCC regulates the amount of signals a computing  
device can allow past its shielding. A Class A device is sufficient for  
office use. Class B provides a more stringent classification for home  
equipment use. TOSHIBA portable computers comply with Class B  
computing device regulations.  
Random Access Memory (RAM): High speed memory within the  
computer circuitry that can be read or written to.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-11  
Glossary  
restart: Resetting a computer without turning it off (also called “warm boot”  
or “soft reset”). See also boot.  
RGB: Red, green, and blue. A device that uses three input signals, each  
activating an electron gun for a primary additive color (red, green,  
and blue) or port for using such a device. See also CRT.  
RJ11: A modular telephone jack.  
RJ45: A modular LAN jack.  
ROM: Read Only Memory: A nonvolatile memory chip manufactured to  
contain information that controls the computer’s basic operation.  
You cannot access or change information stored in ROM.  
S
SCSI: Small Computer System Interface is an industry standard interface  
for connection of a variety of peripheral devices.  
SD card: Secure Digital cards are flash memory widely used in a variety of  
digital devices such as digital cameras and Personal Digital  
Assistants.  
serial communications: A communications technique that uses as few as  
two interconnecting wires to send bits one after another.  
serial interface: Refers to a type of information exchange that transmits  
information sequentially, one bit at a time. Contrast: Parallel  
interface.  
SIO: Serial Input/Output. The electronic methodology used in serial data  
transmission.  
soft key: Key combinations that emulate keys on the IBM keyboard,  
change some configuration options, stop program execution, and  
access the numeric keypad overlay.  
software: The set of programs, procedures and related documentation  
associated with a computer system. Specifically refers to computer  
programs that direct and control the computer system’s activities.  
See also hardware.  
stop bit: One or more bits of a byte that follow the transmitted character or  
group codes in asynchronous serial communications.  
subpixel: Three elements, one red, one green and blue (RGB), that make  
up a pixel on the color LCD. The computer sets subpixels  
independently, each may emit a different degree of brightness. See  
also pixel.  
synchronous: Having a constant time interval between successive bits,  
characters or events.  
system disk: A disk that has been formatted with an operating system.  
For MS-DOS the operating system is contained in two hidden files  
and the COMMAND.COM file. You can boot a computer using a  
system disk. Also called an operating system disk.  
Glossary-12  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
T
terminal: A typewriter-like keyboard and CRT display screen connected to  
the computer for data input/output.  
TFT display: A liquid crystal display (LCD) made from an array of liquid  
crystal cells using active-matrix technology with thin film transistor  
(TFT) to drive each cell.  
Touch Pad: A pointing device integrated into the TOSHIBA computer  
palm rest.  
TTL: Transistor-transistor logic. A logic circuit design that uses switching  
transistors for gates and storage.  
U
Universal Serial Bus: This serial interface lets you communicate with  
several devices connected in a chain to a single port on the  
computer.  
V
VGA: Video Graphics Array is an industry standard video adaptor that lets  
you run any popular software.  
volatile memory: Random access memory (RAM) that stores information  
as long as power is supplied to the computer.  
W
warm start: Restarting or resetting a computer without turning it off.  
window: A portion of the screen that can display its own application,  
document or dialog box. Often used to mean a Microsoft Windows  
window.  
Wireless LAN: Local Area Network (LAN) through wireless  
communication.  
write protection: A method for protecting a floppy disk from accidental  
erasure.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-13  
Glossary  
Glossary-14  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Satellite U200/PORTÉGÉ M500  
Index  
WirelessOpticalMousewith  
Bluetooth Technol-  
ogy 1-19, 8-19  
A
AC adaptor 1-5  
additional 1-18, 8-15  
connecting 3-6  
Wireless Stereo Headset  
with Bluetooth  
Connectors G-1  
Arrow mode indicator  
location 2-10  
Technology 1-19,  
8-19  
Boot Priority 7-3  
Bridge media slot 1-8, 2-4  
location 2-4  
ASCII characters 5-9  
B
Battery  
C
charger 1-18, 8-16  
charging 6-8  
Cache memory 1-4  
Caps Lock indicator  
location 2-10  
Cleaning the computer 4-38  
Cooling vents 2-3  
location 2-2  
extending life 6-11  
indicator 2-9, 6-2  
lock location 2-6  
monitoring capacity 6-10  
pack location 2-6  
real time clock 1-5, 6-5  
release latch location 2-6  
safety precautions 6-5  
save mode 1-12  
D
DC IN  
indicator 6-3  
location 2-2  
types 6-3  
Battery pack 1-5, 1-18, 2-6  
additional 8-15  
replacing 6-12  
BIOS Setup 7-8  
Diagnostic Mode 7-11  
Display 1-7  
automatic power off 1-11  
brightness decrease 5-5  
brightness increase 5-5  
controller B-1  
Bluetooth 1-9, 4-34  
problems 9-19  
hinge 2-7  
Stack for Windows by  
Toshiba 1-15  
opening 3-8  
screen 2-9  
USB Adaptor 1-18, 8-18  
User’s Manual  
Index-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Display hinge  
Fn + F11 (Numeric mode) 5-3  
Fn + F12 (ScrLock) 5-3  
location 2-7  
Display latch  
Fn + F2 (power save mode) 5-4  
Fn + F3 (standby) 5-4  
location 2-1  
Display screen  
location 2-7  
DLA for TOSHIBA 1-17, 4-24  
Documentation list 1-3  
DVD Super Multi drive 1-7  
using 4-12  
Fn + F4 (hibernation) 5-4  
Fn + F5 (display selection) 5-5  
Fn + F6 (internal LCD screen  
brightness decreases) 5-5  
Fn + F7 (internal LCD screen  
brightness increases) 5-5  
Fn + F8 (wireless setting) 5-5  
writing 4-18  
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive 1-6 Fn + F9 (Touch Pad) 5-6  
using 4-12  
writing 4-16  
Fn + space (LCD screen  
resolution selection) 5-6  
Fn + Tab (Optical disc drive  
power icon) 5-6  
Fn-esse 1-15  
Front operation buttons 1-11, 2-8  
location 2-7  
E
Environment 3-1  
Equipment checklist 1-1  
Equipment setup  
general conditions 3-2  
placement 3-3  
Function keys 5-2  
G
Ergonomics  
lighting 3-5  
Graphics controller 1-7  
seating and posture 3-4  
work habits 3-5  
Execute-Disable Bit Capability  
7-8  
External monitor 1-8, 2-5, 8-16  
port location 2-4  
H
Hard disk drive 1-6  
automatic power off 1-11  
HDD Protection 1-13  
Headphone jack  
location 2-1  
F
Heat dispersal 1-12, 4-42  
Hibernation 1-13, 5-4  
Hot keys 1-11  
Fingerprint  
Utility 1-14  
Fingerprint Sensor  
location 2-7, 4-1  
display selection 5-5  
instant security 5-4  
Internal LCD screen bright-  
ness decrease 5-5  
Internal LCD screen  
brightness increase  
5-5  
problems 9-15  
using 4-2  
Floppy disk care 4-28  
Fn + Ctrl (enhanced keyboard  
simulation) 5-3  
Fn + Enter 5-3  
power save mode 5-4  
sound mute 5-3  
standby 5-4  
Fn + Esc (sound mute) 5-3  
Fn + F1 (instant security) 5-4  
Fn + F10 (Arrow mode) 5-3  
wireless setting 5-5  
Index-2  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
HW Setup 1-14  
accessing 7-1  
Boot priority 7-3  
CPU 7-6  
temporarily using overlay  
(overlay off) 5-8  
turning on the overlays 5-7  
L
device config 7-7  
display 7-2  
general 7-2  
keyboard 7-5  
LAN 7-6  
LAN 1-9, 4-37  
active indicator (orange)  
location 2-2  
cable types 4-37  
connecting 4-37  
disconnecting 4-38  
jack 2-2  
LAN active indicator 2-3  
Link indicator 2-3  
Link indicator (green)  
location 2-2  
USB 7-7  
window 7-1  
I
i.LINK 1-8, 2-1, 8-17  
connecting 8-18  
disconnecting 8-18  
port location 2-1  
precautions 8-17  
Indicators 2-9, 6-2  
Arrow mode 2-11  
Battery 2-9  
LAN jack  
location 2-2  
LCD Display Stretch 7-10  
LCD Sensor switch  
location 2-7  
Bridge Media 2-9  
DC IN 2-9  
HDD 2-9  
Numeric mode 2-11  
Power 2-9  
Wireless communication 2-10  
M
Media care 4-28, 8-4  
Card care 8-4  
CD/DVDs 4-28  
floppy disks 4-28  
Memory card care 8-4  
Memory 1-5  
K
Keyboard 1-8, 5-1  
emulating enhanced  
keyboard 5-2  
expansion 1-18, 8-10  
Memory Stick/Memory Stick Pro  
8-6  
Fn Sticky key 5-6  
Function keys F1...F12 5-2  
Hot keys 5-3  
inserting 8-7  
problems 9-12  
removing 8-7  
problems 9-7  
Microphone  
typewriter keys 5-1  
Windows special keys 5-7  
Keypad overlay 1-12, 5-7  
Arrow mode 5-7  
location 2-1  
Microphone jack  
location 2-1  
Modem 1-9, 4-30  
connecting 4-32  
disconnecting 4-33  
jack 2-3  
Numeric mode 5-8  
temporarily using normal  
keyboard (overlay  
on) 5-8  
jack location 2-2  
User’s Manual  
Index-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
properties menu 4-31  
region selection 4-30  
Moving the computer 4-39  
MultiMediaCard 8-9  
inserting 8-9  
indicators 6-2  
panel on/off 1-12, 6-17  
shut down mode (boot  
mode) 3-10  
standby mode 3-10  
system auto off 6-17  
turning off 3-10  
removing 8-9  
N
turning on 3-9  
Numeric mode indicator  
location 2-10  
Problems  
AC power 9-5  
Analyzing symptoms 9-2  
Battery 9-5  
Bios Beep Sounds 9-16  
Bluetooth 9-19  
DVD Super Multi drive 9-10  
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RWdrive  
9-9  
O
Optical Disc Drive  
power icon 1-13  
Optical disc drive  
location 2-4  
P
Password  
External monitor 9-17  
Fingerprint sensor 9-15  
Hard disk drive 9-8  
Hardware and system  
checklist 9-3  
i.LINK 9-17  
Internal LCD display panel  
9-8  
Keyboard 9-7  
LAN 9-19  
Memory expansion 9-16  
Memory Stick/Memory Stick  
Pro 9-12  
power on 1-12  
problems 9-7  
starting the computer by 6-16  
Supervisor 6-16  
user 6-14  
PC card 1-8  
eject button location 2-2  
inserting 8-2  
problems 9-12  
removing 8-3  
slot location 2-2  
Pointing Device  
control buttons 2-8, 4-1  
control buttons location 2-7  
location 2-7  
Touch Pad 1-8, 2-8, 4-1  
using 4-1  
Ports  
Modem 9-18  
MultiMediaCard 9-13  
Overheating power down 9-4  
Password 9-7  
PC card 9-12  
Pointing Device 9-13  
Power 9-4  
Preliminary checklist 9-2  
Real Time Clock 9-7  
SD card 9-11  
Self test 9-4  
Sound system 9-16  
System start-up 9-3  
external monitor 1-8  
i.LINK 1-8  
USB 1-8  
Power  
button location 2-7  
conditions 6-1  
hibernation mode 3-12  
indicator 6-3  
Index-4  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
TOSHIBA support 9-21  
Touch Pad 9-13  
USB floppy disk drive 9-11  
USB mouse 9-14  
Wireless LAN 9-19  
xD picture card 9-12  
location 2-7  
System indicators  
location 2-1  
T
TOSHIBA Assist 1-16  
TOSHIBA ConfigFree 1-16  
TOSHIBA Controls 1-14  
TOSHIBA Direct Disc Writer 4-25  
TOSHIBA Disc Creator 1-16, 4-23  
TOSHIBA Mic Effect 1-16  
TOSHIBA Password Utility 1-17  
TOSHIBA PC Diagnostic Tool 1-16  
TOSHIBA Power Saver 1-14  
TOSHIBA SD Memory Boot  
Utility 1-15  
Processor 1-4  
R
RecordNow! 1-15, 4-22  
Recovery HDD 3-15  
Restarting the computer 3-14  
S
SD card 8-4  
formatting 8-6  
indicator 2-9  
inserting 8-4  
problems 9-11  
TOSHIBA TouchPad On/Off  
Utility 1-16  
TOSHIBA Virtual Sound 1-17  
TOSHIBA Zooming Utility 1-15  
key 5-6  
removing 8-5  
SD memory card 8-6  
SDIO card 8-6  
Security controller 7-10  
TPM 7-8  
Security lock slot 1-11  
attaching 8-19  
Touch Pad  
control buttons location 4-1  
location 4-1  
U
location 2-2  
USB 1-8  
Soft keys  
port location 2-2, 2-4  
USB floppy disk drive 1-6  
problems 9-11  
enhanced keyboard 5-2  
Enter 5-3  
right Ctrl key 5-3  
ScrLock 5-3  
using 4-11  
V
Sound drivers 1-17  
Sound system 1-8, 4-29  
headphone jack 1-8, 2-2  
microphone 2-2  
microphone jack 1-8, 2-2  
mute hot keys 5-3  
Stereo speakers 2-7  
volume control 2-4  
Standby 1-13  
Video modes B-1  
Video RAM 1-5  
Volume control 2-4  
W location 2-4  
Wireless communication 4-33  
indicator 2-10, 4-36  
Wireless communication switch  
1-10, 2-5, 4-36  
setting 3-10  
System automatic 1-11  
Stereo speakers  
location 2-4  
Wireless LAN 1-10, 4-34  
User’s Manual  
Index-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
X
xD picture card 8-8  
inserting 8-8  
removing 8-8  
Index-6  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Tascam CD Player CD DJ1 User Manual
Taylor Frozen Dessert Maker Model 161 User Manual
Toshiba Air Conditioner MMK AP0072H User Manual
Toshiba Laptop A215 S7472 User Manual
Transcend Information MP3 Player Tsonic 520 User Manual
Troy Bilt Yard Vacuum 24B 060F063 User Manual
Tyco eBook Reader IPX200 User Manual
ViewSonic Computer Monitor E70FSB User Manual
ViewSonic Digital Photo Frame VFM1032 User Manual
VTech Cell Phone i6775 User Manual